EXCHANGE
-P/7/
THE PLACE aF THE ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE
IN ENGLISH PROSE
FROM THE OLDEST TIMES UP TO OUR DATS
A SYNTACTIC-HISTORICAL STUDY
BY
BIRGER PALM
PH. LINDSTEDTS UNIVERSITETSBOKHANDEL, LUND
THE PUCE OF THE ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE
IN ENGLISH PROSE
FROM THE OLDEST TIMES UP TO OUR DAYS
A SYNTACTIC-HISTORICAL STUDY
BY
BIRGER PALM
LIC. PHIL.
BY DUE PERMISSION OF THE PHILOSOPHICAL FACULTY OF LUND TO
BE PUBLICLY DISCUSSED IN ENGLISH IN LECTURE HALL VI
MARCH 22, 1911, AT 10 O'CLOCK A. M.
FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
LUND 1911
PRINTED BY BERL1NGSKA BOKTRYCKERIET
PREFACE.
A short time after this little treatise appeared in its first
rather incomplete form, my attention was called to a
work entitled «Die Stellung des Attributiven Adjektivs im
Englischen von den ersten Anfangen der englischen Sprache
bis zur Friih-Neuenglischen Sprach-Periode», by A. Milli-
ner, and published in 1Q06 *. I began to fear that much
of my labour might have been in vain, but soon found
that Milliner was not a very formidable rival. This may
sound arrogant, but the fact is that Milliner's work con-
tains hardly anything beyond a very limited collection of
quotations in the shortest form possible, one half of them
being taken from poetry. The prose texts examined
by my esteemed colleague are: Alfred, Othere and Wulf-
stan (Kluge, Angels. Leseb.); Alfred, Vorrede zur Cura Pas-
toralis (Kluge, Leseb.); Alfred, Cura Pastoralis (E. E. T. S.
Bd. 45); ytlfric, Homilien (Kluge, Leseb.); Saxon Chronicle
(Kluge, Leseb.); Morris, Specimens of Early English, Part
I; Dan Michel, Ayenb. of Inw. (pp. 70-76); R. R. de Hampole
(Matzner, Altengl. Sprachproben); Trevisa, Polychronicon
(Vol. I, Ch. XXIII- XXV) ; Maundeville, Voiage and Travaile
(Matzner; pp. 155-182); Chaucer, Tale of Melibeus; Malory,
King Arthur (pp. 1—50). Voila tout!
It is true that Milliner gives a brief resume after each
period, but he restricts himself to stating that the word-
The copy I possess was printed in New York, 1909.
251389
IV
order is such and such in such and such authors. Besides,
his book presents not a few peculiarities among which may
be mentioned: postposition of a word governing the gen-
itive case (e. g. 'fela' and numerals) is looked upon as
an instance of inversion of the adjective attribute (cf. pp.
18, 24); 'foresaed' is counted a participle (cf. p. 27); 'self
and 'ana' are said to be quantitative adjectives (p. 23);
such words as 'aelmihtig' and 'hunigswettre' are classed
among attributes with an adverbial modifier (p. 27).
It will not be difficult to see that Milliner's disser-
tation cannot have been of much use either to me or to
anybody else wanting to know anything about the rules
for English word-order.
Be it far from me to have pronounced this severe
sentence in order to exalt my own little book! I know there
are many weak points in it and many assertions open to dis-
cussion. But at least I have, to the best of my power, tried
not only to point out the actual state of things, but also
to account for the reason why things are so, and not so.
Many will perhaps blame me for not having suffic-
iently heeded the fact that English is not a pure Ger-
manic language. Maybe they are right. But I cannot
help looking upon the assuming of French influence here
and there and everywhere as often a convenient means
of escaping difficulties. Where such an assumption can be
avoided it should be, it seems to me.
My examples I have arranged chronologically, so far
as that has been possible. As to the spelling of M. E.
words it ought to be noted that in several texts th and p
occur alternately. I have thought best in such texts al-
ways to write th where this is most frequent, and p where
this type is the usual one.
Before finishing this Preface, I will not omit to express
my sincere thanks to my teacher, Professor E. Ekwall, who
has always shown the greatest indulgence and has much
encouraged me during the preparation of the present syn-
tactical study, besides giving me many valuable pieces of
advice. Mr. Bert Hood of this town has kindly gone
through my manuscript and has also helped me with the
reading of the proof-sheets.
Malmo, Febr. 1911.
Birger Palm.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Paragraph.
INTRODUCTION 1—14
(i) What was the original word-order 1 — 10
(ii) Contamination ...... 11 — 12
(iii) The Adverb in an Attributive Function... 13
(iiii) Phrases used as Attributes 14
CHAPTER I. The Past Participle 15—44
(A. As a real Adjective |see § 55] 16)
B. As a quasi-Adjective 17
C. As a real Verb 18-44
1. »I have a father killed» 18
2. » Virtue personified*, >These two united* 19
3. »After grace said» 20
4. P. P. instead of a verbal noun 21
5. P. P. instead of a cond. clause 22
6. Participle Attribute.... 23—43
7. Advertisements and Headings 44
CHAPTER II. The Present Participle 45—54
(A. As a real Adjective [see § 85] 46)
B. As a quasi-Adjective 47 — 48
C. As a real Verb 49—54
1. »He had a fire blazing» 49
2. Pr. Part, in a subst. function 50
3. »For three days running* 51
4. Participle Attribute 52-54
CHAPTER III. The Past Part, as a pure Adjective 55—84
A. 'Aforesaid'. 'Past'. 'Born' 55—72
1. 'Aforesaid' 55—62
2. 'Past' 63—67
3. 'Born' * 68—72
B. Postposition of adject. Past Part, in general 73—84
1. Culinary Art 75
2. Dressing and Weapons 76
3. Workmanship 77
4. Medicine... 78
VIII
Paragraph.
5. Legal Style 79
6. Bible Style 80
7. Noun unstressed, Participle emphatic 81
8. Two Part, outbalancing the weight
of the Noun 82
9. Postposition by Analogy 83
10. The Part, is connected with another
word (comp. adj.) 84
CHAPTER IV. The Pres. Part, as a pure Adjective 85—92
A. 'Being'. 'Coming'. 'Adjoining'. 'Follow-
ing' and 'Ensuing' 85—91
1. 'Being' 85
2. 'Coming' 86
3. 'Adjoining' 87
4. 'Following' and 'Ensuing' 88—91
B. Postposition of adj. Pres. Part, in general 92
CHAPTER V. Participles preceded by Adverbs 93—101
A. Postposition of part, preceded by modal
adverbs 93
B. Postposition of part, preceded by temp-
oral adverbs 94 — 96
C. Participles preceded by quantitative
adverbs 97
D. Pre-position of part, modified by a
modal or temporal adverb 98—101
CHAPTER VI. Adjectives made up of un- and a past part. 102—104
CHAPTER VII. Adjectives in -idle, -able, -ant, -ent 105—114
A. Adjectives in -ible, -able 107—110
1. In a [semi-] verbal function 107—108
2. Without any verbal force 109
3. Adj. in -ible, -able negatived by
un-, in- 110
B. Adjectives in -ant, -ent 111—114
1. Other adj. than 'Present' 112
2. 'Present' 113
Appendix. Adjectives in -ate 114
CHAPTER VIII. 'Due' 115
CHAPTER IX. 'Necessary' and 'Needful' 116
CHAPTER X. Postposition of two adj. connected by
'and' or 'or' 117—123
A. The adj. are added as an afterthought 117—119
. 1. General cases 118
2. Adjectives of opposite meanings... 119
IX
Paragraph
B. Averseness to accumulating too many
attributes 120
C. The attributes outbalance the noun ... 121
D. Noun unstressed, adj. preceded by
adverb 122—123
CHAPTER XI. Postpos. of a single attribute preceded by
a quant, adverb 124 — 131
A. The adj. is more strongly stressed than
the adverb 125—127
B. The adj. and the adv. are both equally
emphatic 128—129
Appendix 1. Emphatic postpos. with other
kinds of adverbs 130
Appendix 2. Postposition with »somewhat» 131
CHAPTER XII. Adjectives preceded by temporal adverbs 132—133
CHAPTER XIII. Postposition of ordinary adj. not qualified
by any adverb 134 — 214
A. Doubtful cases 134—139
1. 'Previous7 134
2. 'Last' and 'Next' 135—136
3. 'Sufficient' 137—139
B. 'Square' and 'Sterling' 140—141
C. Postposition after 'with' 142—147
D. 'Dear' 148—151
E. »Pliny the Elder», »Charles the Great» 152—154
F. Phrases borrowed or copied from the
Latin 155—164
1. Grammatical phrases 155—157
2. Biblical phrases ,... 158—162
3. Titles 163
4. Astronomical phrases 164
G. Phrases borrowed from the French.... 165—176
1. Middle Engl. phrases 168—171
a. Legal style 168
b. Ecclesiastic language 169
c. Learned style in general 170
d. Titles 171
2. Still remaining collocations 172—176
a. Legal style 173
b. Heraldic language 174
c. Titles and terms of chivalrous
life , 175
d. Other expressions 176
Paragraph,
H. 'Proper7 and 'Improper'
177—180
I. Pseudo- Anglo-French terms
181—182
J. Humorous phrases
183—184
K. Postpos. of Rom. adj. in general...
185—189
L. Postpos. with 'thing', 'matter'
190—206
M. Postpos. of native adj. not preceded
.
by any adverb in O. E. and M. E.
207—212
N. Postpos. in isolated cases of native
adj. in Mod. Engl
213—214
CHAPTER
XIV.
Attributes qualified by 'how', or 'too',
and anal
215—222
CHAPTER
XV.
Attributes qualified by 'so', or 'as'
223—233
CHAPTER
XVI.
'Such'
234—237
CHAPTER
XVII.
Pronouns
238—258
1. 'All' and 'both'
238—244
2. 'Many'
245-247
3. 'More' and 'Much'
248
4. 'Other'
249
5. 'Same'
250
6. Whatever
251—252
7. Whatsoever
253
8. Possessives
254-256
9. 'Ana' and 'Sylf
257—258
CHAPTER
XVIII.
Numerals
259—270
1. Cardinals
259-262
2. 'Half, 'double', etc
263—265
3. Ordinals
266-270
CHAPTER
XIX.
Attributes qualified by 'not'
271-274
CHAPTER
XX.
Attributes preceded by more than one
adverb
275—279
CHAPTER
XXI.
Attributes in adv. relation to each other
280—284
CHAPTER
XXII.
Attributes preceded by a lengthy phrase
285—293
CHAPTER
XXIII.
Attributes preceded by an object
294—296
CHAPTER
XXIV.
Attributes followed by a qualifier
297—300
CHAPTER
XXV.
Crosswise word-order
301—309
1. Attribute completed by a prep, phrase
301—304
2. Attribute completed by an infinitive
305—306
3. Attribute completed by a 'than'-clause
307-308
Appendix. »Things, as it is written, won-
derful
309
CHAPTER
XXVI.
» Umschliessung*
310—320
CHAPTER
XXVII.
Reciprocal order between two prep. attr.
321—330
CONCLUSION ..
331-332
BOOKS AND TEXTS EXAMINED.
(I do not here include such works the abbreviated titles of which
will be easily understood by everybody.)
BEDE, Ecclesiastical History; E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 95, 96.
ALFRED, Cura Pastoralis; E. E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 45, 50.
SWEET, An Anglo-Saxon Reader.
Vices and Virtues (1200); E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 89.
Ayenbite of Inwit (1340); E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 23.
WYCLIF, The Engl. Works of; E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 74.
LANFRANK, Science of Cirurgie (1380); E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 102.
ARDERNE, Treatises of Fistula in Ano; E. E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 139.
Early English Meals and Manners (1413); E.E.T.S., Orig.
Ser. 32.
De Imitatione Christi (ab. 1440); E.E.T.S., Extra Ser. 63.
An Alphabet "of Tales; E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 126, 127.
R. ROLLE DE HAMPOLE, The Fire of Love; E.E.T.S., Orig.
Ser. 106.
CAPGRAVE, Lives of St. Augustine and St. Gilbert etc.; E.E.T.S.,
Orig. Ser. 140.
CAXTON, Godeffroy of Boloyne (1481); E.E.T.S., Extra Ser. 64.
CAXTON, Blanchardyn and Eglantine (1489); E.E. T.S., Extra
Ser. 58.
The Coventry Leet Book; E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 134, 135.
The 50 Earliest English Wills; E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 78.
The Three Kings' Sons (ab. 1500); E.E.T.S., Extra Ser. 67.
English Gilds; E.E.T.S., Orig. Ser. 40.
KLUGE, Mittelenglisches Lesebuch.
XII
SKEAT, Specimens of English Literature; 1394 — 1579.
TH. LEVER, Sermons (Arber's English Reprints). 1550.
J. LYLY, Euphues (Arber's Reprints). 1579.
PH. SIDNEY, An Apologie for Poetrie (Arber's Reprints). 1595.
FLORID, The Essayes of Montaigne; Vol. I (World's Classics).
BACON, Essays, Wisdom of the Ancients, New Atlantis (People's
Library).
The New Testament, The Authorised English Version (Tauchnitz).
J. EARLE, Micro-cosmographie (Arber's Reprints). 1628.
R. NAUNTON, Fragmenta Regalia (Arber's Reprints). 1630.
J. MILTON, Areopagitica (Arber's Reprints). 1644.
J. ADDISON, Criticism on Paradise Lost, Spectator (Arber's
Reprints). 1712.
ADDISON and STEELE, The Sir Roger de Coverly Papers (ed.
by R. G. Watkin).
FIELDING, The History of Tom Jones; Vol. I (Tauchnitz).
FIELDING, The Adventures of Joseph Andrews (Routeledge
and Sons).
JOHNSON, Essays selected from the Rambler, the Adventurer,
and the Idler (ed. by S. J. Reid).
MACAULAY, History of England; Vol. I (Everyman's Library).
SCOTT, Quentin Durward (Nelson).
CARLYLE, Sartor Resartus, and Essays on Burns and Scott
(People's Library).
LAMB, The Essays of Elia (People's Library).
E. A. POE, Tales of Mystery and Imagination (People's Library).
THACKERAY, Denis Duval (Tauchnitz).
THACKERAY, The History of Henry Esmond (Nelson).
THACKERAY, The Adventures of Philip (Nelson).
DICKENS, A Tale of Two Cities (World's Classics).
RUSKIN, The Two Paths, etc. (People's Library).
DISRAELI, Venetia (Tauchnitz).
BULWER, Rienzi (Tauchnitz).
Captain MARRYAT, The Children of the New Forest (Tauchnitz).
XIII
MARRYAT, Florence, Her World against a Lie (Tauchnitz).
ELIOT, The Mill on the Floss (People's Library).
JEROME, Paul Kelver (Tauchnitz).
H. CAINE, The Christian (Tauchnitz).
WILDE, The Picture of Dorian Gray (Tauchnitz).
MERRIMAN, Tomaso's Fortune and other Stories (Tauchnitz).
Mrs. ALEXANDER, Brown, V. C. (Tauchnitz).
HARLAND, The Cardinal's Snuff-box (Tauchnitz).
PEMBERTON, Doctor Xavier (Tauchnitz),
TWAIN, Pudd'nhead Wilson (Tauchnitz).
KIPLING, The Light that failed (Tauchnitz).
KIPLING, Plain Tales from the Hills (Tauchnitz).
KIPLING, Puck of Pook's Hill (Tauchnitz).
Mrs. H. WARD, Marcella (Nelson).
Miss BRADDON, Lady Audley's Secret (Nelson).
LORIMER, Old Gorgon Graham (Nelson).
A. HOPE, The God in the Car (Nelson).
A. HOPE, The King's Mirror (Nelson).
MEREDITH, Evan Harrington (Constable and Co.).
KINGSLEY, Two Years Ago (Nelson).
OUIDA, Pipistrello and other Stories (Tauchnitz).
WORKS CONSULTED.
ABBOTT, E. A., A Shakespearian Grammar. London 1905.
BEHRENS, D., Franzosische Elemente im Englischen; Pauls
Grundriss, pp. 950 — 964.
BRADLEY, H., The Making of English. London 1908.
BRUGMANN und DELBRUCK, Grundriss der Vergl. Gramm. der
Indog. Sprachen; V, Syntax.
DAHLSTEDT, A., Rhythm and Word-Order in Anglo-Saxon.
Lund 1901.
EINENKEL, E., Syntax; Pauls Grundriss, pp. 1071-1151.
XIV
EINENKEL, E., Engl. Wortstellung; Anglia XVIII, p. 148 ff.
FRANZ, W., Die Grundziige der Sprache Shakespeares. Berlin
1902.
HELLWIQ, J., Die Stellung des attributiven Adjektivs im Deut-
schen. Halle 1898.
HODGSON, W. B., Errors in the Use of English. Edinburgh
1906.
IDELBEROER, H. A., Die Entwicklung der kindlichen Sprache.
Berlin 1904.
JESPERSEN, O., Growth and Structure of the Engl. Language.
Leipzig 1905.
JESPERSEN, O., Progress in Language. London 1894.
KELLNER, L., Historical Outlines of English Syntax. London
1905.
KOCH, F., Hist. Gramm. der Englischen Sprache; II, Satzlehre.
Kassel 1878.
KRUGER, G., Englische Erganzungsgrammatik. Dresden 1898.
KRUGER, G., Syntax der Englischen Sprache. Dresden 1904.
KUBE, E., Die Wortstellung in der Sachsenchronik. Jena 1886.
LANNERT, G., An Investigation into the Lang, of Robinson
Crusoe. Uppsala 1910.
LATHAM, R. G., A Dictionary of the Engl. Language. London
1866.
LINDROTH, H., Om adjektivering af Particip i svenskan. Lund
1906.
Me KNIGHT, G., Primitive Teutonic Order of Words. Journal
of Germ. Phil., I. 1897.
MURRAY, J. A. H., A New English Dictionary.
MULLNER, A., Die Stellung des Attributiven Adjektivs im Eng-
lischen von den ersten Anfangen der englischen Sprache
bis zur Fruh-Neuenglischen Sprach-Periode. New York
1909.
MATZNER, E., Englische Grammatik, II: 2. Berlin 1865.
MATZNER, E., Alt-Englische Sprachproben, I: 2.
XV
ONIONS, C. T., An Advanced English Syntax. London 1905.
PAUL. H., Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte.
PLATTNER, Ausfuhrliche Gramm. der franzosischen Sprache IV.
POUND, L., The Comparison of Adjectives in English in the
XV and the XVI century. Anglistische Forschungen. 1901.
POUTSMA, H., A Grammar of Late Modern English. Gro-
ningen 1904.
STOFFEL, C., Studies in English. London 1894.
STORM, J., Englische Philologie. Leipzig 1892.
STREITBERG, W., Gotisches Elementarbuch. Heidelberg 1906.
SWEET, H., A New English Grammar, I and II. Oxford 1903.
UHRSTROM, W., Studies on the Lang, of Sam. Richardson.
Upsala 1907.
VISING, J., Franska Spraket i England. Goteborg 1900.
WEIL, H., De 1'ordre des mots dans les langues anciennes com-
parees aux langues modernes. Paris 1869.
WIDHOLM, A. E., Grammatical Notes on the Language of John
Bunyan. Jonkoping 1877.
INTRODUCTION.
(i) What was the Original Word-Order?
According to the accepted grammatical definition the ad- i.
jective attribute is that, property of a noun which is
added to it without any intermedium, whereas the predi-
cative complement is a property added to it by means of
a verb. Looking at the matter from an historical point of
view it is certainly true that the predicative complement in
its present form is a younger phenomenon than the ad-
jective attribute, as it must of course be taken for granted
that the need of such neutral verbs as 'to be', 'to become'
was not felt until a great deal later than the necessity of
having words denoting things and qualities. But if we
leave out of consideration the restriction that the predica-
tive complement requires an auxiliary for its realisation,
matters assume another aspect. The little child that has
but just learnt to speak gives utterance to its opinions in
such a garb as «cake good», «doll nice», long before it is
able to form the phrases «a good cake», «the nice dolb '.
And those who lived in the childhood of mankind, when
the art of speaking first arose, must have shaped their
1 Cf. PAUL, Principien der Sprachgeschichte, § 87: «Bei den er-
sten Satzen, welche Kinder bilden, dient die blosse Aneinanderreihung
von Wortern zum Ausdruck aller moglichen Beziehungen». (Still in:
Ehestand Wehestand etc.) -- Cf. Lat. Terra rotunda = «the earth is
round».
1
2
speech in a similar manner. What then does »cake goocb
mean? No doubt what people of later periods when ar-
rived at a certain stage of development, express thus: »The
cake is good». Here we have the modern predicative com-
plement fully developed. But we might in the same case also
say: «Here is a cake, it is good», or, if we have reached
a still higher degree of linguistic accomplishment: < Here
is a cake which is good». The last two sentences may,
however, be replaced by < [Here is] a good cake». The
«cake good > of the child and of primitive man is, accor-
dingly, exactly the same as the «[a] good cake» of the
more advanced human being; and «a good cake» is, in its
turn, a contraction of «a cake which is good>. Hence it
will be clear that the attributive use of the adjective
is a later stage of development out of its predica-
tive use; the attributive clause has served as an interme-
diate link.
2. But the adjective attribute must also be supposed to
have arisen in another way. While we, in ordinary lan-
guage, speak of <the fretting sorrow ;>, the poet is stilJ al-
lowed to say « sorrow the fretting*. The fretting' is not ne-
cessary for the comprehension of the matter in question,
it is simply an embellishing addition. HELLWIO (Stel-
lung des attributiven Adjectivs im Deutschen, p. 44) makes
mention of such expressions as < Esel, dummer>, «Tropf,
elender» as still occurring in the living popular language,
and he declares the adjective to be only < ein erklarender
Zusatz». I should rather consider the attributes here as
embellishing additions in a less good sense. On the other
hand, in, say, «give me the book, the green [one]» the
adjective is certainly meant as an explanation afterwards
thought necessary.
3. In none of these cases is the adjective organically
and inseparably connected with the noun, and so the phras-
es come nearer to the mode of expression of the child
and of primitive man. It is then out of the apposition that
the restrictive and the merely supplementary attribute has,
to a certain extent at least, developed itself.
From what has here been said it follows that the 4.
adjective attribute, whether it originates from the predica-
tive complement or from the apposition, had for these very
reasons its place after the noun when it first came to be
used. That this is also the word-order most in accordance
with primitive thinking is shown by the following quota-
tions from IDELBEROER, Die Entwicklung der kindlichen
Sprache, and HERRLIN, Minnet: <cDamit sind auch die An-
fange einer Syntax gegeben, die wir auch in der Verbindung
'mea waia-waiar1, dunkler Pelz» (mea =±j Katze, Pelz) finden,
wobei das Adjektiv dem Substantiv folgt» (Idelberger, p.
5Q. He is speaking of a girl four and a half years old.),
«... sein Zahlwort beifugt und zwar gewohnlich nachfolgen
la'sst; z. B. eine Kuh heisst kurzweg 'muh', zwei oder
mehrere Kiihe bezeichnet er als 'muh wei'» (ib., p. 7Q),
Jag har ett helt liv i huvudet mitt, Jag har hela den Th:ska
musiken i huvudet mitt, . . . Jag ar trygg och lugn for tal-
formagan min» (Herrlin, p. 176. Quoted by H. from A.
PETREN, En analys av cirka 800 fall av kronisk sinnessjuk-
dom. It is a patient who has written down the above sentences.).
The following quotation is also interesting: Den minsta
lilla tvaaringen upplat sin nabb: «Vatten . . . my eke . . .
tattvatten . . . mycke» (much [washing-]water) (S. Siwertz, Sv.
Dagbl. 24 Dec. 1910) !.
Postposition is, as is well known, in most cases the 5.
rule in Latin and the modern Romance languages. Post-
position is frequent in Slavonic, old and modern, in Greek,
1 The points are the author's, not mine!
4
and in Sanscrit l. As for the Teutonic dialects, inverted
word-order is .often met with in Gothic even where the
original text has the normal arrangement -. Postposition
is not unknown to Old High German3, Old Norse, and
Old Swedish, remnants of which are Germ, mein Vater
selig, Vater unser, Swed. bror min, and the like. In Anglo-
Saxon, indefinite quantitative adjectives particularly and also
ordinary adjectives, especially in the vocative case, are not
seldom placed after the substantive. This is also the case
in the poetry of most nations, and does not poetry in every
respect exhibit many more archaisms than prose?
6. Lastly, it is not always easy to know what is an at-
tribute and what is a predicative complement in modern
advertising or telegraphic style, or curtailed language in
general. Where the Englishman says « Terms moderate »,
we in Sweden say «Moderata priser». The English phrase
is undoubtedly short for «Our terms are moderate*, but the
adjective will surely be taken by many for an attribute, as
is proved by the fact that the whole phrase can be in-
serted in a real sentence (cf. Swed. Valuta bekommen for-
sakrades, Svenska Dagbl. 27 July 1910). - What is 'critical'
in « Position critical, come home at once»? In all proba-
bility it is meant as a predicative complement, but I do
not see any real obstacle to its being looked upon as an
attribute.
7. Such foot-notes as Words deleted, Words uncertain
(Coventry Leet Book, Editor) may signify either « These
words are deleted, uncertain » (pred.) or < Words that are
deleted, uncertain » (attrib.). Of course it comes to the
same thing whether we take it to mean the one or the
1 HELLWIG, Stellung des attrib. Adj. im Deutschen; DELBRUCK,
Vergl. Syntax; Brugmanns Grundriss.
- HELLWIG.
3 HKU.WIO.
other, but the example shows the near relation between
the attribute and the predicative complement. - - Cf. also:
Kept in heat intense - natives all fainted (Pickwick
Club).
Now this question arises: Why has the original word- 8.
order, i. e. postposition, been given up in our Teutonic
languages? SWEET says, New Engl. Gram. I, p. 194, where
he is treating of the general arrangement of the different
parts of speech: «The natural logical word-order is to put
the subject first and the adjunct-word after it. -
But there are other principles of word-order, which some-
times contradict this purely logical order. Emphatic word-
order consists in putting first that word which is most pro-
minent in the speaker's mind. Thus in such a sentence as
that man is a good man, it is evident that good is a more im-
portant word than the accompanying man . . . Hence many
languages which generally put an assumptive adjective after
its noun often put the adjective first when it is emphatic ».
- Such emphasizing of an adjective we may easily ima-
gine to have taken place long before any adjective attri-
bute in its present form was in hand. Also the
predicative complement is apt to be put before the noun. In-
stead of saying < cake good» the speaker may, if the idea
'a cake' plays an inferior role, say: «good cake*, meaning
it is good, this cake». In far-away times certainly only
such qualities as were essential and of importance used
to be predicated of a thing. Primitive man was surely
anything but a verbose creature. It may then have hap-
pened frequently enough that the word denoting the qua-
lity was a more important part of the sentence than the
noun itself; it may have gone so far that the emphatic
order became the more usual one in this case, and
there we have our modern arrangement complete and ready.
But when the order of adj. — noun had come to 9.
be the most frequent one, or perhaps the one nearly always
employed, it could no more produce the impression of
emphasis. To make the word-order emphatic one had to
transgress the rule; it proved necessary to return to the
original arrangement of the words, and thus noun -j- adj.
became the emphatic order. This shifting must have been
an accomplished fact already in the parent language from
which the several Indo-European dialects have branched out.
10. The further development in this respect shows a dif-
ferent character according to the natural disposition of the
respective tribes. People of a lively temperament use em-
phasis oftener than the more phlegmatic. This may be
the reason why the Greeks and Romans and their descend-
ants are more fond of inverted word-order than Teutons
and Sclavonians. - Emphasis has determined the word-
order in many English phrases consisting of a substantive
and an adjective when the adjective is modified by an
adverb (§§ 124-130).
(ii) Contamination.
11. I have noted down some interesting instances from
Modern Swedish ?n which an attributive adjective has come to
be placed after its noun, through contamination: Dei f inns
saker hardare (There are harder things), Det finns fjorton kort
mindre \i Vdrde} (There are fourteen smaller cards), Det finns inte
tvd mdnniskor lika (There are no two persons alike1). The
sentences quoted are evidently the result of the mixing up
of two separate constructions: Det finns hardare saker
(There are harder things) and [Somliga] saker tiro hardare
(Some things are harder), Det finns fjorton mindre kort (There
are fourteen smaller cards) and Fjorton kort dro mindre (Fourteen
cards are lower in value), Det finns inte tva lika\-dana] mdn-
1 Swed. lika- is an adjective; Engl. »alike is an adverb!
niskor (There are no two congruent persons) and Illte tva mtin-
niskor tiro Ilka (No two persons are alike). The confusion of
construction has been made the easier by the fact that
< det finns> is used as an alternative for «dar ar».
There are quite similar phenomena in English, where
an adjective may sometimes be both an attribute and a
predicate, although in many cases it must certainly be the
former.
Examples: per is an ypocrisye voul an anopre fole
(foolish) and J)e j)ridde sotil (Ayenbit, 1340). If there be
any man faultless, bring him forth into public view (The
Idler). Connected with this there is a hypothesis now cur-
rent (Carlyle, Essay on Scott). There is no act more bind-
ing than that which makes the child the property of the
father (Fl. Marryat, Her World). — / have no man likeminded,
who will naturally care for your state (Auth. Vers., Phil.
II: 20). It was difficult to conceive a scene more silent and
more desolate (Venetia). He could conceive no sympathy
deeper or more delightful (ibid.). Sometimes in the same
couplet we find one line Iambic and the other trochaic
(Abbott, A Shakespearian Grammar).
The participle especially is often found in such an 12.
ambiguous position. Instances of this kind may have con-
tributed to smoothing the way to the possibility of putting
the adjective after its head-word in other cases as well.
Also the following quotations from living Swedish are of great
interest: Medlidande renodladt, det vill saga i och for sig, ar blott ett
och nagonting ytterst fatalt (Strix, 24 Aug. 1910). Redan i l:sta tablan
marktes ett nytt arrangement, korens placering synlig, varigenom ef-
fekten .... vasentligt forhojdes (Sv. Dagbl. 19 Sept. 1910). They show
how easily such transpositions are able to take place when special
qualifications are present.
(iii) The Adverb in an Attributive Function.
13. Before I pass to the real subject of this treatise I
should like to say a few words on the adverb in an attrib-
utive function. Any fundamental difference between an
adjective attribute and an adverbial attribute does not exist,
so far as I can see. The present pronunciation » and < The
pronunciation nowadays) both confer the same ideas; <no
other man» and «no man else» both mean the same thing.
And cannot the adverbs almost be said to be adjectives in
instances like the following:
Set your affection on things above, not on things on
the earth (Auth. Vers., Coloss. 3: 2). My heart alive (Oliver
Twist). A man apart (Two Cities). A boon apart (Pudd'n-
head). A back street near (Paul Kelver). My day out (Punch).
And what prevents us from regarding 'here' and
'there1 in the man here, the house there as adjectival pro-
nouns just as well as 'this' and 'that'?
The only real difference lies in the word-order. If
the attributive word stands before the noun we speak of
it as an adjective, if it stands after the noun we say that
it is an adverb. Now there is a marked tendency, however,
towards putting also an attributive adverb before the sub-
stantive. In his Historical Outlines of English Syntax (pp.
30, 31) KELLNER says on this matter: <The use of an adverb
instead of an adjective ] may be traced back to Middle
English, but then the adverb always follows the noun.
But the adverb preceding the noun is of recent date and
probably due to the influence of Greek ». It seems to me
unnecessary to resort to Greek influence to account for
this phenomenon. In English as well as in several other
modern languages it is by no means unusual to find the
adverb performing the function of a predicate. What won-
1 Of course he means as an adjective*.
der then if it encroaches on the other territory of the adjec-
tive as well, and places itself before the noun by way of
an adjective attribute? The less wonder as the difference
in meaning between an adjective and an adverb could
often be reduced to a minimum. Adverbs that admit of
being put before the substantive are for instance: 'then',
'hither', 'above', 'whilom', 'far-away' (That far-away time;
Lady Audley), 'far-off (The far-off snow peaks; Merriman,
The Mule. A far-off time; Mill on the Floss). 'Yonder'
is used as an adjectival pronoun in < yonder man» and
the like.
That an adjective attribute is apt to be transformed
into an adverbial one is exemplified by the expression «all
day long>, «all his life long», as compared with They f aught e
alle the longe day, in Malory's Morte Darthur (1470).
In at least one instance the position of the adverbial
attribute has certainly influenced that of the adjective attri-
bute (see § 137); in other cases such influence is not im-
possible.
(iiii) Phrases used as Attributes.
It is a well-known fact that in English even whole 14.
phrases and sentences are sometimes suffered to stand be-
fore a noun by way of an adjective attribute, e. g. A little
man with a puffy Say-nothing-to-me-or-I'll-contradict-you
sort of countenance (Dickens 1). But this is nothing but
an extremely complicated instance of the English freedom
in word-coining. The whole phrase is treated as one word,
a rather curious sort of an adjective. Matters of this kind
do not, therefore, belong to the subject I have to examine.
1 JESPKRSEN, Growth and Structure, p. 15.
Chapter I.
The Past Participle.
15. In dealing with the past participle here, careful dis-
tinction must be made between three alternatives: 1) The
participle may have turned into a real conventional
adjective, 2) It may be used as a[quasi-]adjective
for the occasion only, 3) It may, although used
attributively, retain the whole of its verbal force.
16. A. If the participle is a real adjective it is more
convenient for our purpose to postpone its treatment until
later (see Ch. III). But it might not be out of place here
to give some instances of this alternative. A real adjec-
tive, no longer a verb, is Swed. < < given » in / ett givet ogon-
blick, in contradistinction to «den givna tillatelsen» where
'givna' implies an acting person. Real adjectives in the
form of participles are also found in the following English
instances:
The secretaries and employed men ( servants) of am-
bassadors (Bacon). The received (= traditionary) revelation
of the divine will (Venetia). The plural inverts, in most
cases, the accepted (---- usual) signification of the singular
(F. Hall, Modern English). A word which does not re-
semble the name of any known drug(Ver\iy, Macbeth; Notes).
All these « participles* denote some quality of the noun
and on that score differ from the verbal participle.
11
B. Qualities are also expressed by the participles in 17.
the following examples, but here their signification is only
an occasional one:
A hasty fortune maketh an enterpriser and remover,
but the exercised (in opposition to 'hasty'!) fortune maketh
the able man (Bacon, Of Fortune). I undertook to com-
pose his epitaph, which, however, for an alleged (in oppo-
sition to 'real'!) defect of Latinity . . . still remains unengraven
(Sartor Resartus). My supposed voluptiousness in the use
of opium (Opium-eater). When a preposition is used in
this way we call it a detached preposition. Detached pre-
positions are liable to be disassociated from their noun-
words .- ... as in «he was thought of >, where the detached
(no verb!) preposition is no longer able to govern the pro-
noun in the objective case (Sweet, New Engh Gram.).
Derivation, being a process of forming new words, neces-
sarily alters the meaning of the derived word (ibid.). If the
whole group shows a marked falling tendency the inserted
words follow it (ibid.).
C. The participle is a real verb.
1. In such a sentence as: Though there be no blow 18.
given, or: // there be no fuel prepared (both from Bacon), the
participles have, of course, no attributive function. Nor
is this the case in: / have a father killed, a mother stained,
nor in: He found no thing written, nor, probably, in this
quotation either: pu nevre sculdest finden man in tune
sittende ne land tiled (Saxon Chronicle). - - Ic hcebbe pone
fisc gefangenne only shows the origin of the tense called
perf. indicative.
2. In the following instances the participles are to 19.
be regarded as posterior explanatory additions of
rather an adverbial character:
12
Monsieur de Gabelle was the Postmaster, and some other
taxing functionary united (— in one !; Two Cities). All
these impressions united (= together) overcame him (Ve-
netia). Some men kneeled down, made scoops of their
two hands joined, and sipped (Two Cities). A tone of
humour and pathos mixed (The Christian). The proscenium
was surmounted by the German and English flags inter-
twined (ibid.). Virtue personified. She summed him up as
a buccaneer modernized (God in the Car). When two or
three ragged peasants emerged from the crowd to take a
hurried peep at Monsieur the Marquis petrified, a skinny
finger would not have pointed to it for a minute, before
they all started away (Two Cities).
20. 3. Although we say in Swedish «efter gjorda under-
sokningar», «efter skedd omandring», the participles can
in no way be said to be attributes in such English expres-
sions as the following:
Incontynent after grace saide (Early Engl. Meals and
Manners). After the second course served (ib.). After salut-
ation made, they sat down (Pilgr. Progr.). After consulta-
tion had, they resolved to give an answer (Bunyan, Holy
War). Upon invasion offered (Bacon).
These phrases are simply contractions of < after grace
having been said» etc., «upon invasion having been offered;*,
respectively. Similarly: Be-cause of divers condiciones
broken (Coventry Leet Book; 1426). Dick began to whim-
per feebly, for childish vanity hurt (Light that failed).
21. 4. Sometimes a past participle stands in the place
of a verbal noun: Already he had been suffering from
the vexation of a letter delayed (= the delaying of a letter;
Opium-eater). - This is accounted for in this way: <a letter
1 But: The combined (= collective; adj.) ingenuity of Messrs.
Blathers and Duff (Oliver Twist).
13
delayed » is an abbreviation of <a letter having been delayed »,
and this is the same as < [the fact] that a letter had been
delayed », which again might be replaced by <the delaying
of a letter .
Further instances: They looked as they had heard of
a world ransomed or one destroyed (Winter's Tale, V: 2).
Integrity used doth the one; but integrity professed, and
with a manifest detestation of bribery, doth the other (Ba-
con, Of Boldness). Cruel massacres followed by cruel •
retribution, provinces wasted, convents plundered, and cities
rased to the ground, make up the greater part of the his-
tory of those evil days (Macaulay, History). The past has
been a dreary waste with you, of youthful energies misspent,
and such priceless treasures lavished as the Creator be-
stows but once (Twist). With the sense of a danger
escaped (Mill on the Floss). Such a feeling was a
falseness to our true selves, born of some convention, or of
a scruple overstrained, or of a fear not warranted (King's
Mirror). Plaudits renewed proved that their fame had not
slumbered (Evan Harrington). His shrugs at the aspirates
transposed and the pronunciation prevalent (ib.). «You
shall turn into a cross-road» rather suggests the idea of
a case put, an hypothesis made (Molloy, Shall and Will).
5. In the following examples the participles represent 22.
conditional clauses:
What is more heavy than evil fame deserved (Bacon,
Of Death). Penal laws pressed are a shower of snares
upon the people (Bacon, Of Judicature). Good counsel
rejected returns to enrich the giver's bosom (Wakefield).
An affront handsomely acknowledged becomes an obligation
(Sheridan, Rivals). Of all things in the Jungle the wild
elephant enraged is the most wantonly destructive (Second
Jungle Book). Trouble postponed has to be met with
accrued interest (Lorimer, Gorgon Graham).
14
23. 6. All the above quotations tend to evince that the
natural position of the verbal participle is that after the
noun. Therefore, when the Englishman says, «This . . . .
reflects an intimacy with the material handled which is
unmistakable » *, the word-order ought not to make such
a strange impression on Swedish or German ears as it
really does. That fact alone that 'handled' is a contraction
for « which is handled » is no sufficient reason for the in-
verted word-order, for any adjective attribute may be
resolved into an attributive clause, either an indis-
pensable relative clause, as is the case when the attribute
implies a restriction, or a parenthetical clause, as is the
case when the attribute is only a characteristic addition
or an apposition. 'Handled' as in the above sentence is
certainly used attributively, but it is not strictly speaking
an adjective attribute, because 'handled' is not an adjective,
as it does not denote any quality in the noun. A more
suitable term would be participle attribute. It is then
rather a verbal part of the sentence, and so it seems
natural that its given place should be after the word to
which it belongs.
24. But how is it then to be explained that this kind of
attribute occupies the same position in Swedish and Ger-
man as the ordinary adjective attribute, whereas the noun
comes first in English? Let us look into the matter. -
The grammatical construction in question evidently derives
its origin from Latin, and has been further developed in
French. Now it is well known with what ease English
swallows foreign elements raw - as JESPERSEN has it -
without any transforming preparation. A mediaeval Eng-
lish translator of a French phrase containing a noun followed
by a past participle had no need then, in many cases,
G. FriiuKKN, Moderna Sprak, VI, 1909.
15
to change the original expression otherwise than by re-
placing the French participle ending by that of his own
language. The words themselves were transported without
further alteration, and any re-arrangement of them was not
thought necessary. - If, however, the Romance participle
must needs be exchanged for an Anglo-Saxon one, the
French word-order was nevertheless kept, as one was in
no wise unfamiliar with such inversions in other cases as
well (cf. below).
It stands to reason that it was especially in legal 25.
style, where one was as anxious as possible to imitate the
Gallic spirit, that the construction noun -f- past part, instead
of the old manner of writing a full clause came into favour.
And it is still in such language, as well as in official se-
rious style in general, that this mode of expression most
occurs. In free-and-easy language, above all in spoken
English, it would be quite out of place. On this account,
partly by reason of the well-known conservatism of the
British people, the English language up to the present
day has the same order between noun and participle in
this case as it had when the construction in question was
first introduced '. This statement does not, however, hold
good without some restrictions, as will appear later on.
If the participle allows of being interpreted as in some
measure adjectival it is usually placed before the substan-
tive in Present English. Neither would it perhaps be im-
possible to point out a slight tendency towards using the
same word-order as in other Teutonic languages, even
where the import of the participle is decidedly verbal.
POUTSMA says in his Grammar of Late Modern Eng- 26.
lish (p. 341): « Participles are placed before the noun they
1 In Swedish and German, on the other hand, where one was
not used to any kind of postpositive attribute, the participle was
early placed before the noun.
16
modify, when the actions or states they express are not
associated with any limitation of time. This is their reg-
ular place also, when their meaning is that of ordinary
adjectives, i. e. when they have stripped off their verbal
character and have come to denote permanent attributes.
But when the actions or states they express are as distinctly
connected in our thoughts with the limitation of time as in
the case of finite verbs, they are placed after the nouns
they modify, and felt as undeveloped clauses*. The being
felt as undeveloped clauses is, however, no characteristic
applicable to verbal participles only; as such the Englishman
seems to apprehend also ordinary postpositive attributes,
as is shown by the following excerpt: »/ made a couple of
discoveries -quite interesting l (with an unfortunate suppres-
sion of the relative and verb)> (C. S. Fearenside, Moderna
Sprak, April 1910, p. 43).
27. Let us more closely examine POUTSMA'S rule. What
he means to say is evidently this, that inverted word-order
can only be thought of with regard to that which is re-
presented as something done or taking place on a given
occasion. What shall we then say to the following example
cited by POUTSMA in this same connection: It is a truth
universally acknowledged? That a truth is universally ac-
knowledged cannot well be a fact limited to a certain mo-
ment! And how does the word-order in the following
quotation tally with POUTSMA'S rule: Pecock defends images
on the score of the ease with which they recall the stories
of the saints represented (Skeat, Specimens of Engl. Lit.)?
To be sure the verbal act here predicated implies nothing
momentary.
28. We cannot then feel satisfied with the rule that the
esteemed grammarian gives us, but must try to find some
1 A Swedish schoolboy's rendering of »jag . . . hade lyckan att
gora ett par ratt intressanta fynd».
17
more reliable criterion of what we are to regard as a real
verbal participle, and what as a more or less adjectival
participle. But first, let us hasten to dismiss for the
moment those cases where the participle is decidedly ad-
jectival, as it obviously is in the following passages:
It seemeth that death hath no whit discharged the
former of his word given, and that the second, without dying,
was quit of it (Florio). A goodly leads upon the top railed
with statues interposed (Bacon, Of Building. Cf. the inde-
pendent < with statues interposed »!). His stock consisted
of a wooden stool, made out of a broken-backed chair cut
down (Two Cities; cf. § 120). A conversation in which I
was indirectly a party concerned (Opium-eater. < A party
concerned » has passed into a standing expression, where
«concerned» is put after the noun although it has now lost its
verbal character. Cf. It might be thrown out as a pertinent
question for parties concerned; Sartor Res.).
On the other hand, in many cases no such transition 29.
from one class to another can be traced, yet the participle
may stand before the noun, as in: The young man seated
himself in the indicated seat at the bottom of the bed
(Lady Audley).
What, then, is the difference between this and the afore-
mentioned «This . . . reflects an intimacy with the material
handled which is unmistakable*? The great difference is
this: in the latter case one has a definite acting person
(operative force) in view, whereas in the former case one
does not think of any such. The presence in one's
thoughts of a certain agent is then the criterion to
be kept in mind. This means in other words that the
past participle can be replaced by an active attributive
clause (thus, in the above instance: the material which the
author handles). Only in that case is the past participle
regularly placed after the noun in Recent English.
2
18
30. In Anglo-Saxon we find: Se gecyrreda sceada, pas
ongunnenan ding (Aelfric's Homilies l), Fela para gecorenra
engla (Sept. 2). But in these passages the participles are
undoubtedly to be looked upon as adjectives, just as
'acenned' is in: Comon .... to Herode, and hine axodon be
pam acennedan elide (Aelfric's Horn., Nativity of the Inno-
cents; Anglo-Sax. Reader. Cf. « new-born », adj.!).
31. The present construction did not arise, as has been
mentioned already, until the French tongue began to gain
influence on British soil, and probably has its root in the
legal style.
Examples: Be accion atte (at the) suyt of the partle
greved (Coventry Leet Book, 1480). To se the partle greved
have ryght (ib.). Som of the personez endited remayg-
nen in prison (Cov. L. B., 1481). Be confession of the
partie endited (Cov. L. B., 1493).
32. From here it soon spread wider and wider; yet in
every one af the following quotations from older and more
recent periods a distinct agent looms behind:
Aftirwarde whan pou removes ])e emplastre and hap
mundified pe filpe y-fonden (= which thou hast found), If
pou fynde pe bone of it blak it behove]) ... be
drawen out (Fistula in Ano, ab. 1400). pe oile insetted
went out by al pe holes (ib.). For to garse pe place
y-smyten and for to draw out blode per-of (ib.). pus men
gope surely in pe way begonnen (De Imit. Christi, 1440).
He pat desirip to kepe pe grace of god, lete him be kin-
der for pe grace goven, and pacient whan it is taken awey
(ib.). To thentente tencourage them by the redyng ....
of the holy myracles shewyd that every man in his partye
endevoyre theym (Godfrey of Bologne, 1481 ; Prologue).
1 Cited by MULLNER, Stellung des attributiven Adjektivs im
Englischen, pp. 26, 27.
2 KOCH, Hist. Gram., pp. 65, 66.
19
The goode swerde entred in to the brayne porf ended (cleave),
and clove his hed (Blanchardyn and Eglantine, 1489). The
thing described cannot be evill (Sidney, Apologie; 1593).
The one is, when the matter of the point controverted is
too small and light (Bacon, Unity in Religion). Durward
took the road indicated (Quentin, Durward). Lockit's, the
« Greyhound », . . . was the house selected (Thackaray, Es-
mond). To ensure accuracy in the printing of the forms
cited (Skeat, Introd. to A Concise Etym. Diet.). The extracts
given are too short to represent adequately the style of the
author (Skeat, Introd. to Specimens of Engl. Lit.). A heavy
blow that tends to smash or beat in the surface struck
(New Engl. Diet.). The present will of the person addressed
(Molloy, Shall and Will). When the question put is about
a simple matter of fact (ib.). The Abroad Romic» notation
employed would be more acceptable if it were more exact
(G. Fuhrken, Mod. Sprak, IV, 1908). A tendency to
put the governing word after the word governed (Me Knight,
Primitive Teut. Order; cf., however, § 81). The brush used
is a broad flat brush (Studio, Nov. 1910).
Especially when the noun is at the same time quali-
fied by a superlative or an equivalent word ('only', 'all',
'any', and such like) the verbal character of the participle is
prominent. Here postposition is all the more indispensable
as the meaning often becomes another if the participle is
put before the noun. Compare on the one hand:
The first health proposed is that of the newly-married
couple (Moren-Harvey, England och Engelsmannen). The
chief difficulty experienced is that when . . . (D. Jones, Pronun-
ciation of English). The most notable paintings shown were
those belonging to the Sung dynasty (Studio, Nov. 1910). The
earliest electric phenomenon observed (Annandale, Concise
Engl. Diet.). Yet there are sentences whose only subject
expressed is in the singular (Hodgson, Errors in the Use
20
of English). She knew that any poison dropped would find
good holding-ground in the heart of the Colonel's wife
(Plain Tales). The best smoking-mixture ever made;
and on the other hand:
The earliest known edition (Verity, Hamlet; Introd.);
The best made smoking-mixture; The only expressed sub-
ject, where the superlative qualifies the attribute, not the
substantive. Oscar Wilde even has: The only person un-
moved was the girl herself (Dorian Gray); 'unmoved' is of
course an adjective, but its form is that of a past participle
(compare also below, § 102).
34. Also when the word 'one' (or 'that', pi. 'those') stands
for a substantive the same word-order is kept up under
the circumstances mentioned. KRUGER says in his Syntax
(§ 2283) on 'one' + adj.: <Adjektiv + one klingt nach
Umgangssprache. In der hoheren Sprache umgeht man es
durch Wiederholung des Hauptworts oder durch one +
Adj. — Vor P. P. P. \ das nicht adjektivisch gemeint ist, ist
letzteres durchaus notig». (Ex. The husband had been
evidently the one first attacked). - - As far as the latter
statement is concerned, it is of course correct. As for the
former, however, it is indeed doubtful whether in ordinary
Late Modern English, phrases are coined on the model of
such as the following:
Like one distracted (real adj. ===? 'mad' !), He stood like
one thunderstruck; Leicester remained like one stupified
(Kenilworth) (cf. He lay as one dead2)-, Certainly they are
a proof of the converse of spirits and a secret communica-
1 Passive past participle.
2 Such phrases might have arisen through confusion with a
clause with «as if», and this seems all the more plausible as in older
English both 'as' and 'like' were used in the sense of «as if». Like a
man exhausted means the same as As if he were exhausted.
21
tion between those embodied (adj.!) and those unembodied
(Crusoe).
Similar expressions with Mike', although containing a
substantive instead of 'one', may really be met with in
certain modern authors, but they can hardly be considered
as anything other than mannerisms:
He sank upon his rustic bench, like a man exhausted
(Cardinal's Snuff-box). He swayed in his seat like a man
bereft (J. Haslette, Arundel's Aeroplane; London Magazine,
April 1Q10). When that moment came she was like a child
lost and frightened (Pemberton, Doctor Xavier). — Also: John
Briggs looked as one astonied (Kingsley, Two Years Ago).
But with a verbal participle: The one addressed,
Those invited; There was a similar custom with which that
mentioned may be confounded (Kriiger) *.
Because the indefinite article mostly implies some- 35.
thing generalizing, so that an added attribute is in that
case more universal, the past participle in an expression
with 'a' or 'an' is oftener to be set down as an adjective
than as a verb. This of course also applies to an indefi-
nite form without any article and very often to nouns pre-
ceded by indefinite pronouns. Therefore normal word-
order is used in:
£enne a man hap fully sorowe, whenne hym disple-
sij) fordon synne (Wycliff, Of Confession). The commaun-
der of a besieged place ought never to sallie forth (Florio).
An added attribute. A given point. Meditating on the
uncertaintie of some conceived hope (Florio). From the
strong principle of inheritance, any selected variety will tend
to propagate its new form (Origin of Species, Introd.).
Man selects only for his own good; Nature only for that
1 POUTSMA wrongly classes the attributive words in like one
fascinated, like a man distracted among the verbal participles (Poutsma,
Oramm., Ch. VIII, § 104).
22
of the being which she tends. Every selected character is
fully exercised by her (ib., p. 76). The baron got the
worst of some disputed question (Nickleby). The compound
rise expresses doubt of some implied statement (Sweet,
Primer of Spoken English). Other suggested interpretations
are ... (Verity, Coriolanus; Notes).
36. But that such need not always be the case is shown
by the following quotations:
And also other peynez forfeted be rered (Coventry
Leet Book, 1425). As hit appearith by indentur made (Cov.
L. B., 1430). Also y be-quethe ... for oblacions for-etyn
(forgotten), XII d. (Early Engl. Wills, R. Yonge; 1413). I
be-quej)e ... for tiftingys and offeringes forgete, XX d. (ib.,
H. van Sandwyk; 1430). Whether the captaine of a place
besieged ought to sallie forth to parlie (Florio; heading).
I doe not so much remember injuries received (ib.). Think-
ing it harder for our mistress to devise imposition enough
than for us to undergo any difficulty imposed 1 (Troilus
and Cressida, III: 2). No doubt it was for services rendered
that Betty Martin was so bribed (Vanity Fair). This . . .
mark of ... repentance for wrong done (Esmond). 'Your1
is used to appropriate an object to a person addressed
(Abbott, Shakesp. Gram.). As payment for services per-
formed (Chatto and Windus, Slang Diet.). 'Ladylove', a lady
or woman loved (Chambers's Etym. Diet.). In each passage
quoted (Molloy, Shall and Will).
37. If the substantive is qualified by a possessive or
demonstrative pronoun an acting person is never
thought of. The participle is then always adjectival and
accordingly has its place before the noun:
The unfolding of our felt wrongs (Florio). Some frac-
tion of his allotted natural sleep (Carlyle). To lose their
1 'Any' might, however, here have a superlative power; in that
case compare § 33.
23
acquired characters (Darwin). — For want of these required
conveniences (Othello, II: 1). This added name (Jespersen —
Rhode, Lasebok). These here described phenomena.
How antiquated sounds therefore Milton's: This whole
Discourse proposed will be a certaine testimony (Areopa-
gitica, 1644).
Normal word-order is then the rule so often as no 38.
distinct agent is borne in mind. If the participle is only
a more or less superfluous addition, inversion should
in particular be interdicted. Compare the following quo-
tations:
The rebuked Israelite took his bunch of keys (Kenil-
worth). The remodelled procession started (Two Cities).
Amidst the cheers of the assembled throng (Pickwick). Which
of the multitude of faces that showed themselves before
him was the true face of the buried person, the shadows
of the night did not indicate (Two Cities). The young
man seated himself in the indicated seat (Lady Audley).
A portion of the public . . . hurried towards the acquitted
man (Times; Poutsma, p. 141). Then they . . . levered the
released end of the track over so that it met the end of
the newly constructed siding (G. Volk, The Train that was
Lost; Royal Magazine, July 1910). As a matter of fact the
drawn curtain disclosed nothing (Doyle, Adventure of Three
Students). The few remaining auxiliary expressions all re-
tain 'to' before the subjoined infinitive (Lloyd, Northern
English). The subjoined examples (Hodgson).
It is a little doubtful whether there is any such reason
in these two: Mr. Pole took the extended volume (Venetia).
When treating form in black-and-white, with the suggested
interest of colour (Studio, Oct. 1910).
24
Some verbs there are which by virtue of their mean-
ing are nearly always put before the noun when used
attributively. These are: 'desire', 'want', 'need', 'require',
'expect', 'lose', 'remember', and similar words. Such verbs
do not denote an action in the same sense as most tran-
sitive verbs; they are more passsive, and no special agent
is generally thought of, so that their past participles come
very near ordinary adjectives: 'desired' means desirable,
'required' means requisite, and so on.
Examples: It schal bryng in pe desired effecte (Fistula,
ab. 1400). It had not the desired effect (Nickleby). This
would have had the desired effect (O. Twist). It produced
the desired effect (ib.). Full £ 5 of the desired amount
(ib.). A very fixed resolution that the desired result should
ensue (Fullerton, Countess de Bonneval). The chief method
for attaining the desired end (Bain, Rhetoric and Com-
position). To Steele belongs the credit of having forged
the needed implement (Preface to Sir Roger de Coverly,
edited by R. G. Watkin). Fagin beat down the amount
of the required advance from £ 5 to £ 3:4:6 (Twist). In
the meantime, his son . . . kept the required watch (Two
Cities). Pat's Irish eyes were watching Rose, as he lay
with ... his fore-paws in the required attitude (Evan Har-
rington). These were evidently the expected visitors (Denis
Duval). To break the pressure of the expected crowd (Twist).
As a means of identifying the expected green chariot (Nick-
leby). When the expected swain arrived (ib.). The expected
hour of the visitation (Verity, Hamlet; Notes; cited from
Coleridge). Awakening thoughts of the lost girl (Opium-
eater). Till they could catch up with the lost year (Second
Jungle Book). The reward offered for the lost knife was
humbug (Pudd'nhead Wilson). Poor Oliver should, for
the contemplated expedition, be ... consigned to Mr. Wil-
liam Sikes (Twist). An alteration in the design of the
25
contemplated work (Verity, Paradise Lost; Intr.). We can
no longer . . . weep over it, as we do over the remem-
bered sufferings of five or ten years ago (Mill on the Floss).
A renewal of the remembered joy (Lady Audley). Kingsland,
the destined termination of his journey (Essays of Elia). He
talked of projected alterations, as if he really had the power
immediately to effect them (Venetia). The anticipated meet-
ing excited in her mind rather curiosity the sentiment (ib.).
But it may nevertheless happen that the verbal char- 40.
acter of even such participles becomes more prominent;
sometimes the verb has then a somewhat different meaning
from the usual one. So we do find instances of post-
position here.
'Examples: Having a full supply of food for all the
guests expected (Crusoe. === all the guests that I expected.
«A11 the expected guests » might be mistaken for the oppo-
site of «all the unexpected guests»; cf. also the only guest
expected, the dearest guest expected, and § 33). The se-
crecy desired (= enjoined) was so far preserved (Kenil-
worth). Who . . . inferred . . . that I must be the person
wanted (= ordered, sent for. Opium-eater). Where no sug-
gestion is made as to the answer expected (Molloy, Shall
and Will). What their joint feelings would be in the event
contemplated (ib.). Jacob brought back the salt and other
articles required (New Forest. « Other required articles*
might stand in opposition to «unrequired articles*). Just
sufficient colour to cover the space required (Studio, Nov.
1910). Upon the resistance ... of an atmosphere, existing
in the state of density imagined (namely: by myself), I had,
of course, entirely depended (Poe, Hans Pfaal).
Especially the participle 'intended' is thus often found 41.
postpositive: Isabell . . . had utterly been cast away, had
she come unto the port intended, being there expected by
her enemies (Florio). Adapting the apparatus to the object
26
intended, and confidently looked forward to its successful
application (Poe, Hans PFaal). 'That' instead of 'whov
would clearly express the meaning intended (Onions, Syn-
tax). He literally did, but hardly in the sense intended
(Bartlett). In the following quotation 'intend' has not
the same meaning as in the others; it expresses a consid-
erably higher degree of activity and could not stand be-
fore the noun: It is dangerous and misleading to specify
the coins without specifying the particular issues intended
(Swed. «asyfta». C. S. Fearenside, M. S., VI, 1910).
42. Also when the participle is 'proposed', 'promised',
'offered', or, above all, 'appointed', the notion of an acting
person is very often put in the background. Accordingly
pre-position is frequent even in the definite form.
Examples: Artificial rules, which still are compassed
within the circle of a question, according to the proposed
matter (Sidney, Apologie; 1595). This done, the draft of
the proposed petition was read at length (Nickleby). New-
man . . . gave way to the proposed arrangement (ib.). The
benefit derived by this class of students from the proposed
changes (D. Jones, Maitre Phon., Sept.-Oct., 1910) '. Where
was the quiet, where the promised rest (Ess. of Elia). He
then again pressed me to receive a letter of offered pro-
tection from Lady Betty (Clarissa). - Also: The injured
parties should have a right to ... (School for Scandals). -
43. The appointed houre (Florio). Bringing home the cravats
to the appointed hour (Elia). To the appointed time (ib.).
Not . . . until the appointed time (Pickwick). When the
1 POE, on the other hand, has: When they had gone, I spoke
freely with M. Valdemar on the subject of ... the experiment pro-
posed (Facts in the Case of M. Valdemar). — And, naturally: The first
health proposed is that of the newly-married couple (Moren-Harvey,
Engl. och Engelsm.; cf. above, § 33).
27
clock struck the appointed hour (Fullerton, Bonneval). He
persisted in travelling over the appointed course (Opium-eater).
But in bygone days 'appointed' was usually placed
after the noun. It is only in the course of time that it
has lost most of its verbal force.
Examples: And pis knyght mett pis abote at a place
apoyntid, wij) a grete menaye . . . wi|) hym (Alph. of Tales,
15:th cent.). At the houre apointed they came. (Three
Kings' Sons, 1500). [Even: Every man came to his place
appointed, and did their devoir (ib.).] At the time appointed the
king came to Coventrie (Holinshed, Chron.). At the day
appointed, the duke . . . (ib.). The better man should ever
come first to the place appointed (Florio). At the houre
appointed made the sign agreed upon (ib.). Keep times
appointed (Bacon, Of Boldness). Look you, this is the
place appointed (Merry Wives, III: 1).
The same word-order is only occasionally met with
in Modern English:
At the day appointed he turns me at three-score years
and ten adrift upon the earth (Ch. Reade, It is never too 44.
late to mend. Poutsma, p. 188).
7. The succinct style in advertisements and head-
ings has its own phrases. They need here only be men-
tioned cursorily, as they do not reflect the real living lan-
guage, but one highly curtailed. The participle may be
supposed to be an attribute or a complement of the pre-
dicate, it does not matter which.
Examples: Articles lost, found, stolen, or astray ed.
Situations wanted. Reply paid. Woman murdered; Chauf-
feur sentenced (Daily Mail). Adjectives compounded; Com-
parative and superlative doubled (Abbott); The Critic, or A
Tragedy Rehearsed (Sheridan).
28
Chapter II.
The Present Participle.
45. The present participle is like the past participle. We
must distinguish between three special alternatives: 1) The
participle has totally lost its original verbal char-
acter and has become an ordinary adjective; 2) It
is used for the occasion only as a [quasi-Jadjec-
tive; 3) It is an attribute, but retains the whole of
its verbal force.
46. A. «In such combinations as running water, a charm-
ing view the participles are pure adjectives», says SWEET,
New Engl. Gram. § 335. I shall not deal with those
cases here, but reserve them for a special chapter (Ch. IV).
47. B. Quasi-adjectives, and therefore placed before their
nouns, are the participles in:
The greatest living historians (cf. «the greatest histo-
rians living >, where 'living' is a verb, and: «a living crea-
ture», where living' is a pure adjective, the opposite of
'dead'). Yet he is the levyng man that I most love (Three
Kings' Sons, 1500). He would yield to no living creature^
(North, Plutarch). There is not a burning hearth or a stand-
ing stone in all Glen-houlakin (Durward. The participles
do not predicate any qualities, only a kind of activity, as
when I say: «There is not a hearth burning or a stone
standing*).
48. But the participle is often placed after the noun in
this position too, on the analogy of the many cases where
it is a real verb.
1 It is quite natural that 'living' here cannot stand in opposition
to 'dead'! I also think that it is read with a more fleeting accent
than the adj. 'living'. Cf. also no (the best) creature living, where it
is a verb; § 53.
29
Examples: Where is it expressid bi word or bi eny
persoonys ensaumpling in holi scripture that men schulden
make ale or beer (Pecock, Represser; 144Q). Here they do
the ceremonies belonging, and make the circle (II, Henry
VI, I: 4). Under the dread of mischief impending, a man
is not fit for a comforting performance of the duty of
praying to God (Crusoe). The great darkling woods with
a cloud of rooks returning, and the plain and river (H.
Esmond). He would dine then with the Officer Command-
ing, and insult him (Plain Tales. The capitals indicate
that the two words form a set phrase; so 'commanding1
cannot here be felt as a verb, as it is when it denotes
something more occasional). The Officer Commanding
could not well refuse (ib.). His openness to ridicule was
that of a man on his legs solus, amid a company sitting,
and his sense of the same, acute (E. Harrington).
C. The participle is a real verb.
1. It is obvious that the participle is not an attribute 49.
in the following instances:
Without any harm ensuing. He had a fire blazing. I
beheld the people dancing. He that rides at high speed and
kills a sparrow flying (I, Henry IV, II: 4).
It may be the one or the other in: Aelc beorn hcefde
on heonde ane pechene (torch) bcerninde (Fr. Koch, Hist.
Gram.). There is no man living, whom it may lesse be-
seeme to speake of memorie, than myself (Florio). The
remnants of a porch which the stucco falling has left ex-
posed (Paul Kelver).
2. In the same manner as the past participle, the 50.
present participle may be used in a substantival func-
tion, though it looks like an adjective attribute. The ori-
gin of this construction is perhaps to be found in cases
like the following, where 'hills' can be both the accusative
and the genitive case: What else is the awakening his
30
musical instruments . . . ., his telling of the Beastes joy-
fulness, and hills leaping, but a heavenly poesie (Sidney,
Apologie; 15Q5).
Further instances: Groans and convulsions, and friends
weeping (= the weeping of friends), and the like, show death
terrible (Bacon, Of Death). Whence you hear the sound of
jingling spinets and women singing (Vanity Fair). The
wonderful corner for echoes resounded with the echoes of
footsteps coming and going, yet not a footstep was there
(Two Cities). What a laugh she had! - just like a thrush
singing (Dorian Gray). It sounds like a heart beating
(Light that failed). One that represents the sound of an
animal snarling (Verity, Rich. II; Notes). The murmur of
water falling was restful to the ear (Xavier). For a little
while [she] heard nothing but the sound of her own heart
beating (ib.).
51. 3. In all the above quotations the given place of the
present participle is that after the noun. Such is also the
case in the standing expression «For three (four etc.) days
running», where 'running' is rather an adverb than any-
thing else.
52. 4. The attributive present participle is a real verbal
form only when it denotes an action distinctly fixed
as to the time, not a property or an incidental circum-
stance. Only when matters stand thus is postposition of an
attributive present participle the rule (participle attribute).
Here too l we have to deal with a mode of expressing
oneself borrowed from a foreign language. It was un-
doubtedly first used in legal style, as in:
All the billes . . . shul-be . . . red before the coun-
sel 1, and . . . declaryd unto the partie sueyng (Coventry
Leet Book, 1424). And theire indenture to be sealed before
1 As in the case of the past participle attribute.
31
the Maire . . . and that he bryng in at every indenture of
eny prentlse sealyng II s. XII d. to the Cite (Cov. Leet
B., 1496).
Thence it has been transferred to other solemn style
and has there held its ground up to the present time, al-
though inversion does not seem to be quite as indispen-
sable in the case of a present participle as in the case of
.a past participle, probably on account of the less frequent
•occurrence of the combination of a noun and a verbal pres-
ent participle.
Examples: Whan oure inwarde affeccion is muche
•corrupte, it must nedes be t>at pe torching folowing be
.corrupte (De Imit. Christi, 1440). Before the rayne, there
'Came fleying ouer bothe batayls a great nombre of crowes,
for feare of the tempest commynge (Lord Berners, Battle of
Crecy; 1523). Every man praying or prophesying, having
his head covered, dishonoureth his head (Auth. Vers., I
Cor. XI: 4). In order to find out the persons inhabiting
.(Crusoe). The Priests and Priestesses attending chant a
dirge over the bier (Sheridan, Pizarro; Stage direction). Taking
the Parliamentary side in the troubles then commencing
i(Henry Esmond; cf. also § Q6). The ladies listening could
not gainsay this favourable claim of universal brotherhood
(Evan Harrington). The goal of one proposition may form
the initial notion of the proposition following, making a
continuous thought-chain (Me. Knight, Primitive Teutonic
Order of Words). The solicitor prosecuting stated during
the hearing of the case that there was more in the matter
than appeared on the surface (Daily Mail, 2 July 1QOQ).
Secondly, we have its use as a formal subject in which
<;it» represents an infinitive or subordinate clause following
(Onions, Adv. Syntax). The alternative was that someone
passing had observed the key in the door (Doyle, Adv. of
32
Three Students). Old woman knitting (Studio, Nov. 1910.
Under a picture).
53. The present participles of such verbs as do not, as a
rule, indicate any action, but only a state of things, are
not put after the noun unless the latter is qualified by a
superlative or a similar word (e. g. 'all', 'only'). In that
case alone do these present participles denote a verbal act.
Examples: Truste not . . . in pe wilyness of eny man
livyng (De Im. Christi, 1441). No man living could tell
what they said (Pilgr. Progr.) How much more unfortu-
nate than all the women living (North, Plutarch). No man
living is more bound to show himself thankful (ib.). Of
the Gothic, the only monument remaining is a copy of the
gospels (Johnson, Diet.). Kotzebue saw himself the greatest
man going (Carlyle, Ess. on Scott). The best men living
(Ruskin, Two Paths). The only person sleeping. The worst
creature existing.
The following instance is therefore an exception: The
poor daub that Evil has painted over it, hating the sweet-
ness underlying (P. Kelver). — The same is, of course, the
case with the following, although there does not exist any
verb 'pend' in the living language: Miss Crawley being
pleased at the notion of a gossip with her sister-in-law
regarding the late Lady Crawley, the funeral arrangements
pending, and Sir Pitt's abrupt proposal to Rebecca (Van-
ity Fair).
Otherwise: The sleeping girl was awakened. The liv-
ing generation. The missing money was not found (Krtiger).
The few remaining auxiliary expressions all retain 'to' before
the subjoined infinitive (Lloyd, Northern English).
54. Normal word-order is always employed when the
participle is merely an extra addition of no great conse-
quence, or in general weakly stressed.
Examples: At last one of the advancing bulls stood
33
still (New Forest). The resulting pe, pat, peo was at first
used, as in O. E., both as a dem. and as a def. article
(Sweet, New Engl. Gramm.). The resulting sound differs
from the corresponding breathed plosive in being pronounced
with less force (D. Jones, Pronunc. of Engl.). In such a
sentence as <that man is a good man» it is evident that
'good' is a more important word than the accompanying
'man' (Sweet, N. E. Gram.). In some words the e is always
written and in such it forms a diphthong with the following
vowel (Sweet, Anglos. Reader). Then they tore down the
obstructing wall (G. Volk, The Train that was Lost; Royal
Mag., July 1910).
Chapter III.
The Past Participle as a pure adjective.
A. Aforesaid. Past. Born.
Among those past participles which have changed into
pure adjectives special interest is attached to aforesaid (and
its equivalents), past, and born.
1. Aforesaid etc. It is clear that 'afore-said' and 55.
'above-mentioned' as in «The cases above mentioned », «The
premises afore said» were at the outset used verbally, just
as the participle in «The instances [here] quoted » belongs
to the verbal class. But they can hardly be said to be so
now. On account of their frequency they have — exactly
like our Swedish 'ovannamnd', 'sistnamnd' - lost their ver-
bal meaning and have grown into pure adjectives, or per-
haps rather adjectival pronouns. Thus it has also fared
with the simple 'said'; nobody thinks of an agent any
more. Therefore: The muslin curtain of the said door
would get out of order (Two Years Ago).
34
56. In Anglo-Saxon we find the adjectives 'foresprecen'
and 'foresaed', and they are placed before the noun: Ond
Jiy ylcan gere worhte se foresprecena here geweorc be Lygan
(Saxon Chronicle). Se foresprecena hungur (Fr. Koch,
Hist. Gram.). Se foresceda halga (ib.). Seo forescede boc (ib.).
They were pure adjectives coined after the pattern of
Lat. «predictus»; for in Anglo-Saxon there was no verbal
attribute. But in Middle English, when that novelty was
brought in by the French, the new (or resuscitated) words l
'before-said', 'afore-said', etc. were certainly first felt as equiv-
alent to active attributive clauses, and so they were placed
after the noun (cf. also § Q4). Soon, however, they got
weakened into adjectives and could stand before the sub-
stantive. Yet in. the majority of cases they kept their old
place, for they were mostly, or nearly exclusively, used in
legal style2, and this style was half French. And, as
such language is always ultra-conservative, the same word-
order is there still retained.
Examples: pe landys beforenemnyt («Schott. Schied-
spruch», 1385; Kluge, Mittelengl. Leseb.). pe cause bef ore-
say de (ib.). Thise wronges biforesaide («Lond. Urk.», 1386;
Kluge). I Alice West, lady of Hynton Marcel befornemed
(Early Engl. Wills, Alice West; 13Q5). Thomas my sone
forseyd (ib.). With alle . . . tapites that longeth to my chap-
ell forsayd (ib.). For to have the governance of the II
nyghtes beforseid (Coventry Leet Book, 1421). John Well-
ford and his felows above-namyd (ib.). In the mater afore-
named (Cov. Leet B., 1446). All thes peynyes abovesaid be
reryd to the use of the comyn profet (ib.). ]3ei schuld
have J)e governaunce of all pis puple forseyd (Capgrave, St.
1 The A.-S. words died away; in later A.-S. they were not used,
since what was then written was almost exclusively poetry.
2 I have there even found this curious passage: Forfatur of the
said tymbur abovesaid (Coventry Leet Book, 1421).
35
Gilbert; 1451). The Alderman of the seid Glide shalbe at
Seynt Katrynis Chapell aforesaid (Ordinances of the Gild
of St. Katherine, Stamford, 14Q4; E. Toulmin Smith, Engl.
Gilds). And also it is ordeynede yat alle . . . shul comen . . .
to ye Chirche forsayde ... up ye peyn forseyde (Gild of
St. Botulph., ib.). That they shal pay VI d. in forme above-
seid (Ordin. of Worcester; ib.).
Thus also in similar learned style: Huervore pise 57.
zeve pinges tovore yzed bye}) ycleped blyssinges (Ayenb.
of Inw., 1340). WiJ) pe oyntment of dyvylyn aforeseid and
a elope wette in water (Fistula in Ano, ab. 1400). In the
seconde course for the metes before sayd ye shall take for
your sauces: wyne, ale, vynegre and poudre. Araye him
in the maner aforesayd (Boke of Kervynge, 1413; F. J.
Furnivall, Early Engl. Meals and Manners). Our righte
heritage beforeseyd (Maundeville; Kluge, Mittelengl. Leseb.).
In time, however, these words came to be used in 58.
literary language as well, and mostly without any changing
of the accustomed word-order. Even in Late Modern Eng-
lish inversion is often met with, yet the result is mostly
an impression of archaism or humour.
Examples: Alle the contreyes and lies abovesaid (Maun-
deville, Voiage and Travaille, 1366; N. E. D.). Thies thre
reaumes aforeselde (Three Kings' Sons, 1500). Everich of
the kynges aforesaid (ib.). Making his residence at Glas-
gow for the cans afoirtold (Hist, of James VI, 1582; N.
E. D.). By that command to Peter, and by this to all
Ministers abovecited (Milton, Consid. Hirelings, 1653; N.
E. D.). For the reasons aforegiven (Richardson, Pamela; N.
E. D.). Nor is it sufficient, that a man who sets up for
a Judge in Criticism should have perused the Authors
above-mentioned (Addison, Spect., Febr. 2, 1712). Upon
this my friend with his usual cheerfulness related the par-
ticulars above-mentioned (Roger de Coverly). He then ran
36
away with her over the field to the rivulet above-mentioned
(Fielding, Tom Jones). Owing to the distemper above-men-
tioned (ib.). By some years' daily practice of riding to
and fro in the stage aforesaid (Elia). The world aforesaid
(ib.). The six small boys aforesaid cheered prodigiously
(Pickwick). The young lady aforesaid (ib.). The principal
magistrate aforesaid (ib.). Forthwith appearing before the
coffee-room blinds aforesaid (ib.). The other half of the
roll of flannel aforesaid (ib.). To attract the notice of the
gentleman aforesaid (Twist) i. One of Dick Boyce's first
acts .... had been to send a contribution to the funds of
the League aforesaid (Marcella). Since the year 1882 above^
mentioned (Skeat, Introd. to A Concise Etym. Diet.).
In the following two quotations 'above' -f- 'mentioned' seems
to be really verbal: The man above mentioned (New Forest). The
valuables above mentioned (Merriman, In a crooked Way).
59. When the substantive is a pro per noun postposition
may still be said to be the rule, probably because the ad-
jectives are then appositional addenda, rather than real at-
tributes.
Examples: When young Lord Egham, before mentioned,
got the erysipelas (Thackaray, Philip). Who . . . accompa-
nied him to his lawyer, Mr. Bond, before mentioned (ib.). In
default of which issue the ranks and dignities were to pass
to Francis aforesaid (H. Esmond). Punch, in the hands of
George Powell afore-mentioned, had set himself up as a
censor of manners (Roger de Coverly, Notes; R. G. Watkin).
60. As will have been noticed, inverted word-order also
occurs very often after a possessive or demonstrative pro-
noun 2 in older English. I have found a few instances of
postposition after a poss. pron. in 18:th century English,
but none in Present English:
1 Otherwise DICKENS mostly places this word before the noun,
most probably always when he is earnest.
2 Compare § 37.
37
In open war with his Majesty aforesaid (Gulliver).
As I observed in my letters above-mentioned (Richardson,
Clarissa). One word more from my noble and venerable
lord aforesaid (Scott, Qu. Durward).
After a dem. pronoun I have not met with any in-
stance of postposition in Modern English.
I subjoin some examples of pre-position 1 in the ear- 61.
lier idiom: The frontels of the for say d auter (Early Engl.
Wills, Alice West; 13Q5). Summe of the bifore seid men
(Pecock, Represser). The afore-rehersede wurthy-men (Cov-
entry Leet Book, 1455). Our aforesaid King (Florio). As
in the afore-named dialogue is apparent (Sidney, Apologie;
15Q5). The afore-mentioned battle (Pilgr. Prog.). The above-
mentioned particulars (Addison, Spect., Febr. 2, 1712). The
before-mentioned opinions (T. Jones).
Darwin treats «above specified » as an adjective in: 62.
The above-specified breeds, The above-specified marks (Origin
of Species).
Otherwise, when the collocations have not been so
frequently used as to have grown into adjectives: The
awful locality last named (Twist). The monosyllable just re-
corded (ib.). The three little boys before noticed (Nickleby).
A handkerchief before noticed (Pickwick).
This is, of course, the order also when the adverb
follows the participle: The charter cited above (Saxon Chron.;
Earle and Plummer, Notes). — And, for reasons easily
understood: In the manner as above mentioned (Crusoe).
2. Past. The participle 'past' has come to be used 63.
not only as an adjective, but also as an adverb and a pre-
position. When it was a real verbal participle, it was natural
1 Also in Anglo-French this word-order occurs: Les susditz
Eveqe et countte, Nostre dit counsaill (Cov. Leet Book; letter from
Henry VI). Whether this order was the usual one, I do not know.
38
to let it follow the substantive. Hence its use as a pre-
position developed itself (cf. 'ago'):
As his predecessours many yeres past have hen (Cov.
Leet Book, 1480). He had nearly lost the use of his legs
for a few years past (Irving, Sketchbook). In consequence
of having worn the regimentals for six weeks past (O. Twist).
For years past English sailors had been exploring the
universe (Verity, Tempest; Introd.). The robbers are ex-
pert diamond-thieves who have been following Mr. Gold-
smith for days past, watching their opportunity (Daily Mail,
July 3, 1909).
In the following quotation one does not quite know whether
'past' is an adjective or a preposition, which shows how easily the
transition is apt to take place: Dick was in the Park, walking round
and round a tree that he had chosen as his confidante for many Sun-
days past (Kipling, Light that failed).
64. 'Past' was often associated with Mast' and then nat-
urally placed after its noun (cf. § 94).
Examples: The X day of December last past (Cov.
Leet B., 1430). In the tyme off John Michell last past (ib.,
1439). By Michelmasse day last passed (ib., 1464). The
XI/II day of Jule last passed (ib.). The even last past, had
[he] spoken wyth hym (Blanch, and Egl., 1489). I have
not been out of the saddle for six days last past (Rog. de
Coverly). Even the Cock-lane ghost had been laid only a
round dozen of years after rapping out its messages, as
the spirits of this very year last past rapped out theirs
(Two Cities).
65. Hence its rather adverbial use in connection with a
dem. pron. in expressions of time:
Pontanus and other recount the like metamorphosies
to have hapned in Italy these ages past (Florio). You don't
know what I have suffered within these few weeks past
(Clarissa H.). He has scarce done an earthly thing for
this month past (Wakefield). I have read it in his eye for
39
this hour past (Durward). These few months past . . . have
proved that you and Humphrey can .... (New Forest).
On the analogy of such phrases, 'past' was always 66.
put behind in the adverbial expression «in time(s) past».
Still it may be possible that this is partly -due to the near
resemblance to the corresponding French expression.
Examples: Ordenaunce .... made in tyme past (Cov.
Leet B., 1440). In tymes past men were ful of pytie and
compassion (Hugh Latimer, Sermon on the Ploughers;
1549). I my-selfe know none so ill as my-selfe, who in
times past have bene . . . (Euphues, 1579). He which per-
secuted us in times past (Auth. Vers., Gal. I: 23; 1611).
Though they in time past had offered great affronts to his
person (Pilgr. Progr.). His insolence in times past to them
. . . he'd got to look to (Mill on the Floss).
Also «in days past» : Oure progenitours in dayes past (Cov.
Leet B., 1474).
By further analogy we often find adj. 'past' after its 67.
head-word in other cases as well:
J)ere shal be no remembraunce of pe toys passed (De
Imit. Christi, 1440). In recompense of their service past
(North, Plutarch). In regard of our deliverance past, and
our dangers present and to come (Bacon, New Atlantis).
Both dangers past and fears to come (ib.). As if fames
were the relics of seditions past (Bacon, Seditions). I had
terrible reflections upon my mind on the account of my
wicked and hardened life past (Crusoe). The times past
are said to have been a nation of Amazons (Adventurer).
Of this I have not hit upon any instance in Present
English. 'Past' is there used prepositively:
The great men of past centuries (Nickleby). Past years
recurred to him like a faint . . . dream (Venetia). It seemed
impossible that past events should be so obstinate (Mill on
the Floss).
40
It may perhaps not be too daring to ascribe many of
the instances of postposition of the adj. 'past' to the fear
of confusion with the prep. 'past'.
68. 3. Born. The primary word-order in < He was born
a lord» was another, namely, «He was a lord born». For
in Anglo-Saxon, and also in Middle English, a non-attribut-
ive participle was usually placed at the end of the sen-
tence, as in German »Ich bin ein Protestant geboren» 1.
Compare:
Herodes from him selfum ofsticod (Sax. Chron.; Kube,
Wortstellung in der Sachsenchronik). Sie hi mid stanum
ofworpod (Alfred's Laws; Me Knight). To Westseaxena
kyninge, Cynegyls gehaten (Aelfric, Life of King Oswald).
And ear me menn sindon sare beswicene and hreowlice be-
syrwde and ut of disan earde wide gesealde (Wulfstan, Ad-
dress to the English; Anglos. Reader). This have I by
credible informadon learned (Th. More, Rich. III). A boy
of no high blood borne (Malory, Arthur). In a cedule
yn this closed (Cov. L. B., 1461) 2.
Still in Modern English in: As in duty bound, Ernest
called on Diana (Winds. Mag., July 1910).
69. 'Born' in »He was a lord born» in the meaning of
«He was born a lord» is, of course, no attribute, but it
is easily understood that it might have been taken for one.
Who could, therefore, determine whether we have to deal
with an attribute or a predicative complement in instances
like the following:
By nature they were beggars born (1. Sam., II: 8; Pilgr.
Progr.). Duke: What is that Barnadine who is to be exe-
cuted in the afternoon? Provost: A Bohemian born, but
1 German has, it is well known, preserved most of the old Teu-
tonic word-order.
2 Cf. also: For certaine considerations us moevyng (Cov. L.
B., 1461). Honestly thame-self behaveynge (F. of L., 1435).
41
here nursed up and bred (Measure, IV: 2). Sarah Battle
was a gentlewoman born (Ess. of Elia).
So 'born' has kept this place also when used attrib- 70.
utively, in those cases where its character of a verb is
not quite obscured: Howe should than a Frenche man
borne soche termes con (Chaucer, Test, of Love). Come, -
boy; I am past moe children, but thy sons and daughters
will be all gentlemen born (Winter's Tale, V: 2). Yet I live
like a poor gentleman born (Merry Wives, I: 1) '.
And finally the same word-order is often preserved 71.
even when 'born' is a pure adjective in the sense of
Swed. «boren», i. e. ^endowed with the qualities that be-
long to the idea».
Examples: In his person ... every body distinguishes
the gentleman born and educated (Clarissa). Your dress, as
I consider, is a sort of disgrace to a cavalier born, and the
heir of Arnwood (New Forest). Edward appeared as he
was - - a gentleman born (ib.). The authority of any writer
but an Englishman born and bred (Molloy, Shall and Will.
This phrase has grown into a standing expression).
As a rule the real adj. 'born' is not, however, placed 72.
after the noun in normal Mod. English: He was a prince,
a born prince (Verity, Hamlet; Introd.).
This is the necessary construction when the word in
question cannot be interpreted in any other way: And me
bound, too, to a born devil (O. Twist). The first vanity
of your born eccentric is that he shall be taken for in-
fallible (Meredith, E. Harrington). The Countess was a
born general (ib.).
1 In the following it looks as if we had to deal with compound
words: Stalwort men and old, gentle born and peasant born (Two
Cities).
42
B. Postposition of adjectival past participles in general.
73. We have already seen how frequently postposition
of participles does occur in English. We have seen that
the truly verbal past and present participles are nearly always
placed after the noun they modify. We have also seen that
such is often the case with past participles that were orig-
inally verbal, but have come to be adjectives. And we
shall see that inverted word-order is not at all rare even
when no such reasons can be descried. It would indeed
be surprising if analogy should not have exerted its level-
ling influence. Why should one not be permitted to put
an ordinary attributive past participle after its head-word
when in so many cases the participle could, or must, stand
behind? Instances are exceedingly frequent in Middle Eng-
lish, but they diminish considerably towards the more
recent periods. In Anglo-Saxon there are only a few, and
those are to be set down as Latinisms.
74. Several categories can be discriminated1: Direct
French influence is apparent in phrases that belong to
the arts of cookery, dressing, medicine 2, workmanship. Some-
times it is the Anglo-Norman legal style that reap-
pears; sometimes it is the language of the Latin Bible;
in some cases the substantive is of very little importance,
but the attribute all the more significant (emphasis);
again, in other cases there are two participles which outbal-
ance the weight of the noun.
75. 1. Culinary art.
'Garlic stampid, salt fisch . . . and amptyn I-stampid
1 I leave out such cases as: pa geseah ic swelce ic gesawe
same duru onlocene (Cura Past.), He shall show to you a great sup-
ping place arrayed (Wycliffs Bible, Mark. XIV), He will show you a
large supper room furnished (Auth. Vers., Mark. XIV), where the
participles may be predicative.
2 Imitation of Latin is here, of course, also possible.
43
(Science of Cirurgie, 1380). Fyrste sette ye forthe mustarde
and brawne, potage, befe, motion stewed (Book of Carving;
1413). With vinegre and percely theron and a tansy e fried
and other bake metes (ib.). Vele, porke, pygyons, or chek-
yns rosted (ib.). Pike boyled, Lamprons ybake, Vele ro-
sted, Pertrich stewyde (Two 15th Century Cookery-Books,
edit, by Th. Austin. Headings). How she longed to eat
adders' heads and toads carbonadoed (Winter's Tale, IV: 4).
In stead of bread, they use a certain white composition,
like unto corianders confected (Florio). L. has recorded
the repugnance of the school to <gags», or the fat of
fresh beef boiled (Ess. of Elia). A name for hake-fish dried
and salted (Verity, Tempest; Notes; cf. also § 117). « Burnt
sack» was wine heated or mulled (Verity, Tw. Night; Notes;
cf. also § 82). «Hungbeef»: beef spiced or salted (Watkin,
Rog. de Coverly; Notes; cf. also § 82).
2. Dressing and weapons. 76.
Ring ne broche . . ., ne gar del imembred ne gloven ne
no swuch }}ing (Ancren Riwle, ab. 1200). A swerd har-
nesed, a wodeknyf harnesed, and a Dagger (Early Engl. Wills,
J. Credy; 1426). A gowne of scarlet with slyt slyves
y-furred (E. E. W., R. Dixton; 1438). I had on a broad
belt of goat's skin dried, which I ... (Crusoe). Richly
trapped in blue velvet embroidered (New Atlantis). A rich
cloth of state of blue satin embroidered (ib.).
3. Workmanship. 77.
Hare unirude duntes wij) melles istelet (Sawles Warde,
ab. 1200). Silver sponys with acharnus (acorns) overgald
(E. E. W., Th. Bathe; 1420). 1 marc and a cuppe over-
gilte (Cov. Leet B., 1426). A litell basyn knopped, and III
candelstikes (E. E. W., R. Elmesby; 1434). A litill coverkull
for his coppe ygilt (ib.). A litill panne of brasse y-ered
(ib.). An coavered cuppe gilt (E. E.Wills, R. Dixton; 1438).
Silver gilt (ib.). With handsome windows, some of glass,
44
some of a kind of cambric oiled (New Atlantis). Metal
vitrified (ib.). Its weight in gold ay, gold well-refined,
I will say six times (Scott, Kenilworth). Arm-chair in wood
carved and gilt (Placard in Wallace Coll., London; cf., how-
ever, § 117). Detached high relief in gilt copper chased and
engraved (ib.). - Cf. also: Silver repousse (Studio).
78. 4. Medicine.
Take J)e pouder of crabbis brent VI parties, gencian
III parties (Science of Cirurgie, 1380). Off woundes Im-
postemede (tumorous) (ib.; heading). f>at is to sai litarge
nurschid (ib.). A good quantite of tow I-tosid (ib.). Flour
of bras brent, vitriol leed brent (ib.). £is is a medicyn
compouuned (sic! ib.). After pe sleyng of flessh putred [
(Fistula in Ano, ab. 1400). Pulver of hennes feperez y-brent,
of an old lyn elope y-brynt, asshen of heres of hares
y-brent 2 (ib.). A mitigative of akyng to emeroidez bolned
(ib.). Ladanum, storax calamita, anyse rosted, and sich ope
(ib.). Ane herbe y-brissed pat is called pede lyon (ib.).
79. 5. Legal style.
Vifte is mid wyfman ymarissed (Ayenbit, 1340). Man
y-sponsed (ib.). If so be he be a Notary sworen and ad-
myttyd and may not refuse hit (Cov. Leet B., 1423). And
that they scale with measures insealyd (ib. 1421). That no
man delyver no werk but be weyghtes ensealed (ib., 1450).
Oure Manoir of Cheylesmore is ... a place franchesied (ib.,
1464). There is no power in Venice can alter a decree
established (Shakesp.). The supplanting or the opposing
of authority established (Bacon). According to all prece-
dents in disputes of matrimony established (Twist). The
victorious conqueror met with the body of his enemie de-
ceased, mourned very grievously for him (Florio). Mr. Ham-
1 Latin text: Post mortificationem putridce carnis!
2 But, where the style is less «learned»: Ful of blak fil[) in
maner of brent flesch (Fistula).
45
merdown will sell by the orders of Diogenes's assignees
... the library, furniture, plate, wardrobe, and choice cellar
of wines of Epicurus deceased (Van. Fair). The beautiful
Lady Tollimglower, deceased (Pickwick). — Authority limited
(Kipling). Ticket limited (in the United States) !.
6. Bible style. 80.
Oyle owtgettede es J)i name - (Rich. Hampole, ab. 1350).
It smellys oyle outgetted (ib.). In syngne of Cryste cruci-
fiede (ib.; Milliner). From |)e levaciourt of cristis body
sacrid in til pat ... (Guild of St. Mary, Norwich; Toulmin
Smith, Engl. Gilds). Joe whiche shal be reveled in us in
tyme ordeined (De Imit. Christi, 1440). A true king anoynted
(Malory, Arthur; Milliner). Knowing, brethren beloved, your
election of God (I. Thessal; I: 4; A. V.; cf. also § 148).
7. The noun is unstressed, but the participle em- 81.
phatic.
pei J)at might not wel suffre temptacion were made
men repreved and failed in her way (De Imit. Christi 1441).
I count it but time lost to hear such a foolish song (As
you like it, V: 3). For their second nobles, there is not
much danger from them, being a body dispersed (Bacon,
Of Empire). Like the bleeding of men murdered (Naun-
ton, Fragmenta Regalia; 1630). What is then this narrow
selfishness that reigns in us, but relationship remembered
against relationship forgot (Clarissa). A thousand carriages
come tumbling in with food and other raw produce inani-
mate or animate, and go tumbling out again with produce
manufactured (Sartor. Cf., however, § 142 ff.). The invari-
able principle of political action in searches for articles
concealed (Poe, The purloined letter). One of a family of
tyrants, one of a race proscribed (Two Cities). I tried to
find my way out of this chamber - - a chamber accursed
1 Langenscheidt, Land und Leute in Amerika, p. 116.
2 Latin Text: Oleum effusum nomen tuum.
46
(Ouida, Pipistrello). There is no such separation heard
between words spoken as is between words printed (Lloyd,
North. Engl.).
82. 8. Two participles outbalancing the weight of the
noun 1.
Zuiche clepejj oure Ihord: berieles (sepulchres) ypeynt
and y-gelt (Ayenb., 1340). Y bequeth ... my wrecchid
body to the erthe sanctified and halowed (E. E. Wills, 1454;
cf. also § 117). ' If ye continue in the faith grounded and
settled, and be not ... (Auth. Vers., Col. I: 23). To gratify
their curiosity with knowledge, which, like treasures buried
and forgotten, is of no use to others or themselves (Ram-
bler). Those . . . who have seen death untimely strike
down persons revered and beloved (Esmond). To take the
place of their betters killed or invalided (Light that failed).
83. Q. In the following quotations there do not seem
to be any special reasons for the inverted word-order,
other than those of analogy.
J)e tende is of wyfmen to clerkes yhoded (Ayenb.,
1340). Maki of one mete vele mes desgysed (\b.). To kepe
a lyme (limb) woundid fro swellynge (Science of Cir., 1380).
A boon to-broken (ib.). Every festre ... is heelid wi]> pis
medicyn I-preved (ib.). And cover it wij3 a lynne clothe
y-wette (Fistula in Ano, ab. 1400). fre schappe of a fist
y-closed (ib.). He bare opon hym an evangell wretten (Alph.
of Tales; 15th cent.). Cled all in parchemyn writyn, wijj
smale letters wretten ])eron (ib.). A thousand knyghtes
armed (Caxton, Historyes of Troye; 1477). Here endeth
the table of the content and chapytres nombred of this
present book (Godfr. of Bol., 1481). For to shewe hit to
the knyght wounded, that he shulde take the more comfort
(Blanch, and Egl., 148Q). Or other person diffamed (Cov.
1 Cf. § 121.
47
Leet B., 1492). A man which can rede in bokis stories
writun (Pecock, Represser). A beard neglected, which you
have not (As you like it, III: 2). Third Apparition: a Child
crowned, with a tree in his hand (Macbeth, IV: 1). Masque
of the Gipsies Metamorphosed (Ben Jonson). For he saith,
I have heard thee in a time accepted, and in the day of
salvation have I succoured thee * (Auth. Vers., II. Corinth.
VI: 2). And was delivered of Pallas armed, out of his
head (Bacon, Of Counsel). I remember an Irish rebel con-
demned put up a petition that he might be ... (Bacon,
Custom and Education). Making provision for the relief
of strangers distressed (New Atlantis). Mansoul has weap-
ons proved, and garments white as snow (Bunyan, Holy
War. Rhythmical reasons?). I observed somewhat that looked
like a boat overturned (Gulliver. Cf. «Like a man exhausted »
etc.). Note the eyes slightly askance, the lips compressed,
and the right hand nervously grasping the left arm (Two
Paths. The reason is here probably a desire of conform-
ity). When the sight of some shop-goods ticketed freshen-
ed him up (Elia). They looked curiously small, moreover
- the garden circumscribed, the two-storied house, with
its striped sun-blinds (Cardinal's Snuff-box). They could
see the shimmer of bronze armour . . . and the friendly
flash of the great shield uplifted (Kipling, Puck of Pook's
Hill). The hard road goes on and on past altars to Legions
and Generals forgotten, and broken statues of Gods (ib.).
Behold, there were the Eagles of two strong Legions en-
camped (ib.; cf., however, § 120).
10. I insert here the following quotations also in 84.
which the participle in connection with another word
forms a compound adjective:
1 Immediately after this comes: Behold, now is the accepted
time, probably because «now is the time accepted* might be mis-
understood.
48
Ostlers trade-fallen (I, Henry IV, IV: 3). Nothing but
the granite cliffs ruddy-tinged (Sartor). The feeling of
Heavenly Behest, of Duty god-commanded (Carlyle, Ess.
on Scott). To pace alone in the cloisters or side aisles of
some cathedral, time-stricken, is but a vulgar luxury (Elia).
Chapter IV.
The Present Participle as a pure adjective.
A. Being1. Coming. Adjoining-. Following and Ensuing^
It will be necessary to devote a special section to
the adjectival participles being, coming, adjoining, following
(and its synonym ensuing).
85. 1. Being.
The participle in «for the time being» may, it is true,
be said to Tiave a pregnant signification («going on», or
something like that), so as to express a weak degree of
activity. It might then be looked upon as a verb, but
certain it is that nobody is sensible of that when he uses
the expression, which has passed into a set phrase equiv-
alent to «for the present time», or «on that occasion ».
It is not quite improbable that we have here to deal with
an inheritance from the Anglo-Norman time.
Examples: And that the Stuarde off the Gilde for the
tyme being shall truly controulle them (Gild of St. Katherine,
Stamford; Toulmin Smith, Engl. Gilds). Aldermen of this
City for- the time being shall be ordered and appointed (An
Act on the 'Election of Sheriffs, 1748; Gray Birch, Hist.
Charters of London). The light deprived her, for the time
being, both of the power to rise and of the wit to think
(Dr. Xavier).
2. Coming.
'Coming' is also a pure adjective, in spite of its po-
sition after the noun, in [the] time coming*. But it is not
necessary that it should have been so from the very be-
ginning; it might have been a verbal participle then. I
am not aware of any French analogue.
Examples: In tyme comynge (Chaucer, Melibeus; Milli-
ner). Allso we command that no Bocher ne vitaler in
tyme corny ng mak non ordynaunce but . . . (Cov. Leet
Book, 1421). Who shal be besy for ^e in tyme corny ng
(De Imit. Christi, 1440). For to be hald in mor reverens
in tyme comand (Capgrave, St. Gilbert; 1450). He that
hopes or depends upon time coming, dreams waking (Ba-
con, Of Death). It shall and may be lawful in all time
coming for the English people to communicate with each
other (Opium-eater).
3. Adjoining. 87.
'Adjoin' does not express so much activity, as rather
a state of things (= «be near»). Nevertheless the participle
'adjoining' is often found after the noun it modifies. This
may partly be due to its somewhat adverbial character,
nothing preventing us from regarding it as an adverb
adjunct, just like 'near' or 'close by' in a similar position.
Examples: The first that came to him were the lords
of Lincolnshire and other countries adjoining (Holinshed).
A private house in the town adjoining (Gulliver). I broke
my way from the ball-room into a small ante-chamber ad-
joining (Poe, Wilson). Sikes dragged her into a small room
adjoining, where he sat himself on a bench (Twist). They
began to search narrowly the ditch and hedge adjoining (ib.).
4. Following, Ensuing. 88.
In, say, «The preceding word is but a dim image of
the clause following*, «The article belongs more properly
to the noun following than to the genitive », 'following' is,
50
of course, a verb, not an adjective. So it was originally
in temporal expressions too, but there it stands already on
the border line between a verbal participle and an adjective,
or it has just passed over to the latter category. Com-
parison with French suivant easily suggests itself, all the
more because «ensuing» is used alternatively. But direct
French influence should only be thought of as a means of
establishing the word-order.
Examples with 'following1: In pe day, forso^e, folow-
yng (= the day following the one last mentioned, but
also: on the next day!) I ... perceyved . , . (Fistula, ab.
1400). To chose kepers for the yer folowyng (Cov. Leet
B., 14Q5). And the night following the Lord stood by him
(Acts, 23: 11; A. V.). I took shipping for Lisbon where
arrived in April following (Crusoe). I arrived at the country
town at twilight, in order to be ready for the stage-coach
the day following (R. de Coverly). On the fifth night
following 1 he was seen for the last time (Sartor Res.). He
arrived at his destination in the October following (Macaulay,
Warren Hastings; Poutsma). On the day following Oliver
and Mr. Maylie repaired to the market-town (Twist).
In normal Present English 'following' precedes its
noun in expressions of time. Yet, necessarily: At noon on
the second day following 1 he did not feel that the campaign
had been in vain (Winds. Mag., July, 1910; cf. above).
Examples with 'ensuing': Sullen looks and short an-
swers the whole day ensuing (Wakefield). I trust you re-
member we mean to taste the good cheer of your Castle of
Kenil worth on this week ensuing (Kenil worth). Would you
not prefer, sir, to have the items added on to the month
ensuing (Ev. Harrington) -.
1 It seems to be rather adverbial here, but may be verbal.
2 Cf. also: On the day succeeding (Esmond).
51
Variants are < next following*, <next ensuing», which 89.
belong to the older idiom only.
Examples: Also it is ordeynede yat alle ye bretheren
and sisteren of yis fraternitee shul comen, on ye monday
next folowande, to ye Chirche forsayde (Gild of St. Bo-
tulph; T. Smith, Engl. Gilds). Within a quarter of a yere
next folowynge (Ordinances of Worcester; T. Smith, Engl.
Gilds). On the morrow next ensuing (Holinshed). And
crown her Queen of England, ere the thirtieth of May next
ensuing (II, Henry VI, I: I)1. -- Also «then next ensuing*:
The Seturday then next suyng (Cov. Leet B., 1457). The
XV day of Feveryere then next suyng (ib.).
Sometimes 'next' is placed before, and the part, after: 90.
In the next weke suying the kyng came to Coventre (Cov.
L. B., 1464). If thou the next night following enjoy
not Desdemona, take me from this world with treachery
(Othello, IV: 2).
Even when distinctly a pure adjective, or, if preferred, 91.
a pronoun (= 'this'), 'following' ('suing') is very frequently,
by analogy, put after the substantive in older English.
Examples: j)ise bye|) J)e capiteles of pe hoc volginde
(Ayenbit, 1340). As it schal be told in pe VIII chapitle
folowynge- (Science of Cirurgie, 1380). In pe pridde tretis
folowynge 2 (ib.). I ... make my testament in the maner
suyng* (E. E. Wills, J. Credy; 1426). They have made
this ordynaunce folowyng (Cov. L. B., 1421). Wherupon
the Meir lett make of thies wurthy men folowyng .... (ib.,
1424). In the forme and maner folowyng (ib., 1444). All
1 «Next coming» is used in the same way, in close imitation
of Anglo-Fr. prochein venant (e. g. En le mois davrell prochein ve-
naunt, En Iverne prochein venant [Cov. Leet B., 1430]): At Esture next
cotnyng (Cov. L. Bv 1421). At Mydsomer next comyng (ib.).
2 In these two quotations 'following' may, however, be a verbal
participle. Cf. also p. 50, foot-note 1.
3 In legal style this word-order is not surprising.
52
pese transiimpciones folowing. rehersi|3 our auctour (Cap-
grave, St. Gilbert; 1451). Pay to the seid Craft of Card-
makers XIII s. IIII d. in the forme saying (Cov. L. B., 14Q5).
Also that no seriaunt take of eny citezen for servynge of
a capias eny thynge but in maner folowynge (Ord. of Wor-
cester; T. Smith, Engl. Gilds). In form and manner folow-
ing (Gild of St. Katherine, Stamford; T. Smith). In which
is plainly to be seen, what wit can and will doe, if it be
well imployed, which discourse following, although it bring
lesse pleasure to your youthful mindes, then the first dis-
course, yet will it bring more profite (Euphues). In what
manner? In manner and form following, sir (Love's Labour,
I: 1). Let there be certain persons licensed to lend to known
merchants upon usury, at a higher rate, and let it be with
the cautions following: . . . (Bacon, Of Usury).
In Modern English 'following' always stands before the noun in
the above sense. Yet Dickens has, in evident imitation of the Middle
English style: The arbour in which Mr. Tupman had already signal-
ized himself, in form and manner following: first the fat boy . . .
(Pickwick).
In this instance: And they went forth and preached everywhere,
the Lord working with them, and confirming the word with signs
following (S. Mark, 16: 20), the part, is most probably verbal. Com-
pare, however, also below, Ch. XIII, C.
92. B. Postposition of adjectival present participles
in general.
Postposition of a pres. part, is by no means rare in
Anglo-Saxon prose. This may be due to Latin influence,
but I would rather make no distinction, in this early per-
iod of the language, between participles and ordinary
adjectives. It will be pointed out further on that also the
latter are often placed after the noun in Old English. So
I refer to § 207 below.
In Middle English postposition is very frequent, as
53
in the case of a past participle. I suppose the reason to
be not so much direct French influence although in
some translations it is often undeniable as rather
analogy *.
Examples: And swa swa claene neten eodorcende in
|)aet sweteste leod gehwyrfde (Alfred, Caedmon; Anglo-S.
Reader). An hrider dugunde (Kentish Charter; ib.). Grow-
ende gsers and seed wircende (Gen.; Matzner, Gram.). Fur
beorninde (Old Engl. Homilies; Miillner). Snow sledrende
{ib.). J»anne cum]) J)e hali gast J)e is all fier barnende (Vices
and Virtues, 1200). A huyt zech vol of donge stynkinde
(Ayenbit, 1340). pe clerk zyinde ne yzy^}) nag-t (ib.). £er
byej) leazinges helpinde, and leazinges likynde, and leazinges
deriynde (hurting) (ib.). And J)er was a pyler of yrn byrn-
and, sett full of sharpe rasurs (Alph. of Tales; 15th cent.).
And J)an he send unto hym his wyfe and his childre wep-
and, J)at besoght hym to forgiff hym (ib.). Atte porte des-
cendeth a fressh water rennyng whiche is lytil in the somer
{Godfrey of Bol., 1481). The londe is ful of depe waters
rennyng and large mareyses (ib.). She mounted anon upon
her whyte palfray amblyng 2, and sayde . . . (Blanch, and
Egl., 148Q). Ladyes for whome I have foughten whanne I
was man livinge (Morte Darthur).
The following instance is uncertain, inasmuch as the
participle may be verbal: ])urch hwam bieo4 alle wittes and
alle wisdomes and alle tungen spekinde (cf. «the only man
speaking». Vices and Virtues, 1200).
The following is an instance from Modern English,
but the word-order may be due to special reasons: The
handbill had the usual rude woodcut of a turbaned negro
1 But we cannot say with MATZXKU (Engl. Sprachproben I, 2,
p. 62): «Part. auf -inde stehen natiirlich haufig nach».
2 French text: la haguenee (« whyte palfray amblyng»).
54
woman running \ with the customary bundle on a stick
(Twain, Pudd'nhead Wilson).
Chapter V.
Participles preceded by adverbs.
A. Participles preceded by modal adverbs.
93. In case a participle is modified by a modal adverb
its verbal character becomes more prominent than usual,
as it is almost exceptional for an ordinary adjective to
be accompanied by an adverb of that kind. Accordingly
there are numerous instances of postposition under these
circumstances. In the oldest language this is the only
occurring word-order, in Middle English it is the rule. An
attribute preceded by a modal adverb seems to have been
a too heavy combination to be placed before the noun.
Indeed, it was not until modern times that this began to
be thought feasible. In Wycliffs: Restitucioun of extor-
cions and evyl geten goodis (Leaven of Pharisees), we are
therefore bound to presume a compound adjective (cf.
<wi]) outen» [ib.] in two words!).
Examples: Ac monige scylda openlice witene beoj) to
forberanne (Cura Past.). f>onne he ongiet be sumum {)in-
gum odde fieawum utone cetlewdum call [>aet hie innan pen-
cead (ib.). Nedeful it is J)at a surgian be of a complexioun
weel proporciound (Science of Cir., 1380). A surgian muste
have handis weel schape (ib.). Brynge a^en Jje rondness
of ])ilke ulcus .... wij) a knyf hoot brennynge (ib.). He
come]} of a wounde yvel heelid (ib.). Fretyng with a threde
strengely yfestned (Fistula in Ano; ab. 1400). A wounde
1 Cf. § 120, and perhaps also § 174.
55
yvel y-cured (ib.). Coton wele y-tesed (ib.). To him and
to hys heirs of ys body lawfully be-goten (E. E. Wills, Sir
W. Langeford; 1411). pis man pus hurt herd telle of f>e
grete myracles (Capgrave, St. Gilbert; 1451). O])ir neces-
saries of his rentys and of oj)ir good lefully goten (ib.).
A pagent right well arayed (Cov. Leet B., 1456). As in a
ship, wares well stowed and closely piled1 take up least roome
(Florio). O, knowledge ill-inhabited (As you like it, III: 3).
Suit ill spent, and labour ill bestowed (Much Ado, III: 2).
A message well sympathized (Love's Labour, HI: 1). The
great multiplication of virtues upon human nature resteth
upon societies well ordained and disciplined 1 (Bacon, Custom
and Education). They were like horses well managed and
disciplined l (Bacon, Simulation and Dissimulation). Some
fine banqueting-house with some chimneys neatly cast, and
without too much glass (Bacon, Of Gardens). A Queen at
Chesse of gold richely enameled (Naunton, Fragm. Reg.; 1630).
This is the benefit which may be had of books promiscuously
read (Milton, Areopagitica). Having a head mechanically
turned, I had made for myself a table and chair (Gulliver).
As the slipper ill executed was censured by a shoemaker
(Rambler). An expanse of waters violently agitated (ib.).
Sentiments generally received (ib.). Some means of happiness
really existing (ib.). By efforts successfully repeated (Wake-
field). Two young ladies richly dressed (ib.; cf. § 120). There
were household officers, indeed, richly attired; there were
guards gallantly armed (Durward). Ere his adversary could
extricate his rapier thus entangled, he closed with him (Kenil-
worth). A fine rider perfectly mounted (Philip; cf. also § 120).
Such delicate complexions artificially preserved and mended1
(Two Cities). A beadle properly constituted (Twist). No
doubt, had I been a man well born, I should have fallen
Compare, however, § 82.
56
at her feet (Pipistrello). That pleasant content .... which
follows rest properly employed (Xavier). This . . . adds a
charm to out-door exercise that older folks in districts
better policed enjoy not (P. Kelver). She . . . had given him
a book of nursery rhymes brilliantly illustrated, which he
greatly enjoyed (Mrs. Alexander, Brown, V. C.). The
subtle monotony of their music, so full as it was of com-
plex refrains and movements elaborately repeated, produced
in the lad a form of reverie (D. Gray).
B. Participles preceded by temporal adverbs.
94. What has been said above (p. 54) also applies to the
case of a participle modified by a temporal adverb. It
stands to reason that the verbal character, i. e. possibility of
expressing different shades of time, must here stand forth
with great distinctness '. In fact, it is not easy, many a
time, to decide whether the participle thus qualified is a
verb or an adjective. It may, however, with full certainty
be set down as a verb in such cases as these: When the
religion formerly received is rent by discords (Bacon). Some
system of building already understood (Ruskin). Such
may be the case also in: There existed proofs -- proofs
long suppressed - of his birth (Twist), although the in-
version in this quotation is more probably due to the total
want of stress of the noun (Cf. §§ 130, 132).
It will be good to compare: Cured of a canker by
the sign of the Crosse, which a female newly baptized (—
who had been baptized only a short while ago) made unto
her (Florio), and: A newly-baptized woman (Swed. <nydopt»,
not «nyss dopt»; one idea).
95. It is particularly when the participle is in the present
tense that the verbal element is predominant, as witness:
1 Cf. Our view into long past geological ages (Darwin, Origin).
'Past' is otherwise usually an adj., but here it must be verbal.
57
My Lord of Essex death in Ireland and the marriage
of his Lady yet living (Naunton, Fragm. Reg.; 1630). A
time which is within the memory of men still living (Ma-
'caulay, Hist.). He was uncle to the fine old whig still
.living (Elia). Taking the Parliamentary side in the troubles
then commencing (Esmond). There were the two beds and
the fire still burning (Pickwick). There is no need for
anyone to add to the thousands of pictures already existing
(Studio, Nov., 1910).
More or less verbal, adjectives or verbs at discretion, 96.
are the participles in the following quotations:
£is witnessi]) he in pat sermone often alleggid (Cap-
grave, Augustine; 1450). And broght J^aim owder a swyne
or a schepe new slayn (Alphabet of Tales; 15th cent.).
A pair of old breeches thrice turned (Shrew, III: 2). This is
a piece of prudence lately discover' d (Milton, Areopagitica).
She was the sole daughter of the only sister of my mother
long departed (Poe, Eleonora). I trust I shall be found to
have little, if at all, trespassed upon ground previously oc-
cupied (Bulwer, Rienzi; Preface). In the name of that sharp
female newly-born, and called La Guillotine, why did you
come to France? (Two Cities). A face habitually suppressed
and quieted, was still . . . (ib.; cf. also § 82). The honest
keeper's wife brought her patient a handkerchief fresh washed
and ironed (Esmond) 1. A standard of perfection compar-
able with that given to the plants in countries anciently
civilized (Darwin, Species). He wanted energies for com-
bating evils now forgotten (Opium-eater). The scarlet dew
that spotted the hand seemed brighter, and more like blood
newly spilt (D. Gray). — Compare also: Our existing chron-
icles, and many others now lost (Earle and Plummer, Sax.
Chron.; Vol. II, Pref.).
Compare, however, also § 117.
58
97. C. Participles preceded by quantitative adverbs
are not more verbal than they are when standing alone.
Therefore postposition is rare under ordinary circumstances *.
I have only three instances to cite:
Whyning like a Pigge halfe rosted (Euphues). He
found the body of a lad half-clothed lying there (New
Forest). A crowd in those times stopped at nothing, and
was a monster much dreaded (Two Cities).
D. Pre-position of participles modified by a modal
or temporal adverb.
98. With what hesitation a participle preceded by a modal
or temporal adverb is placed attributively before a noun, is
shown by the fact that many authors up to our days tack
the adverb to the participle by means of a hyphen, notwith-
standing the two words do not in reality constitute one
idea only.
a. Examples with modal adverbs:
The gaily-equipped Cavalier cavalry (New Forest). By
means of those illegibly-written, incorrectly-spelt, but incom-
parably agreeable letters (Fullerton, De Bonneval). A pair
of crookedly-hung pictures (Hodgson, Errors in the Use of
Engl.). His fondly-loved wife (Lady Audley). Lamp and
fire-light showed a finely-carried head (Marcella). A neatly-
kept, respectable-looking house (Brown, V. C.).
b. Examples with a temporal adverb:
The consolation of the never-leaving goodnesse (Sid-
ney, Apologie; 15Q5). Our often-assaulted bodies (ib.).
The never-fading fruits thereof (Pilgr. Progr.). ' That fair
and always-remembered scene (Esmond). The last-built
institution (Two Paths). This long-neglected art (Ruskin,
Otherwise see Ch. XI.
59
Architecture and Painting). Long-continued self-fertilisation
(Darwin, Origin). The now-vanished pomp (Rienzi). The
long-sealed door (Venetia). The oft-quoted classical exam-
ples (Verity, Tempest; Notes). An ever-swelling chorus
(Verity, Hamlet; Introd.). That recently-despised but now
welcome article of costume (Mill on the Floss. Cf. <now
welcome» without any hyphen! 'Welcome' is an adj.). The
oft-repeated wail (Light that failed). Long-neglected can-
vasses (ib.). The long-pent-up delirium (ib.). The ever-felt
contrast (Verity, Coriolanus; Notes).
c. With other kinds of adverbs this is rare: "•
The neere-following prosperitie (Sidney, Apologie). That much-
admired spot (Durward). Its arched and far-receding path (Marcella;
possibly a comp. adj.). Half-clothed (Marryat; certainly a comp. adj.).
Half-frightened (B. Harte, By Shore and Sedge).
Instances of a participle preceded by a temporal 100.
adverb being placed before the noun without any hyphen
do not, as a matter of fact, occur until modern times
with very few exceptions at least.
Examples: The ever whirling mills (Macaulay, Hist.).
Long hoarded spleen (Sheridan, Rivals). All hitherto discov-
ered Universities (Sartor). My as yet sealed eyes (ib.). The
complex and sometimes varying conditions of life (Darwin,
Origin). Long past geological ages (ib.). The still smoking
ruins (New Forest). Their now increased Sunday dinner
(Venetia). The once gilt (adj.?) frame (P. Kelver). His hither-
to envied young devil of an heir (Pudd'nhead Wilson) A.
With and without a hyphen side by side: The recently 101.
discarded favourite and the long-banished minister (Fullerton,
De Bonneval).
The following are from older times, but in most of them we
seem to have to deal with a compound adjective, rather than two
separate notions: Se cer gef arena broftor getacnad Crist (Cura Past.).
1 Compare also: Tom's hitherto unforgiven offences (Mill on the
Floss). Some as yet unidentified source (Verity, Hamlet).
60
pu aa iblescet laverd (Life of St. Juliana; Milliner), fre first be-gotcn
child hite ludas (Capgrave, Sermon; 1422). Thei please to remember
the longe continued and hertly love betwixt them (Cov. Leet B., 1480).
His untrue and long purpcnsed malice (ib., 1481).
Chapter VI.
Adjectives made up of un- and a past participle.
102. The possibility or necessity of placing a participle
after its head-word has come to influence those adjectives
in particular that are made up of un- and a past participle.
They have been felt as equivalent in meaning to a participle
negatived by 'not', all the more as un- is not unstressed.
That the words in question are not always wholly
destitute of verbality appears from such instances as the
following, where they are used predicatively: There be no
evyll unpunyshed, nor no good unrewarded (Lever, A Ser-
mon; 1550). There live not three good men unhanged in
England (I, Henry IV, II: 4). These mean: «There is
no evil [that is] not punished », « There live (or: are) not
three good men [that are] not hanged », or, turned into a
positive form: « Every evil is punished*, «A11 good men
no three excepted - are (or: have been) hanged in
England*. - An ordinary adjective could not be used in
that way.
Thus also: He hcefde ])agyt, da he ]>one cyningc
sohte, tamra deora unbebohtra syx hund (Voyages of Othere
and Wulfstan; Anglos. Reader).
Still more conspicuous is the verbal character in the
following instance from Modern English : A case, which
should prove a warning to those paper — sellers who fail
to return the papers unsold, was heard at Dunstable (The
People, 11 July 1909). The word 'unsold' may indeed here
61
be " said to be a verb just as much as is 'sold' in « The
papers sold»; it corresponds to an active sentence. — Sim-
ilarly: The only person unmoved was the girl herself (Dorian
Gray. Cf. «The only person moved, not moved»).
Collocations of these kinds may, therefore, have 103.
greatly contributed to the propagating - - if they are not
the origin - of the word-order which is exemplified by
the following quotations and appears to be, and to have
been, common enough:
O|)er alsso [>at before men lyfe in fleschly penance
unsene (Fire of Love, 1435). ])e flaume unmesurde of lufe
(ib.). It happenij) som tyme })at a persone unknowen shinej)
by bright fame (De Imit. Christi, 1441). Be reasonable
cause unfayned (Cov. Leet B., 1444). J)e coveryng wi])
which a wommanys heed oug" to be covered was oonli |)e
heer of wommenys heed unschorn (Pecock, Represser; 1449).
If eny mysdoers, or persones undisposed, shuld be ... (Cov.
Leet B., 1472). As on holy body undivided (ib., 1480).
Muche better myghten the people of the Citie resorte to
defende on parte unwalled then to defende many paries
uncalled (ib.). Diverse ben fledde ... to paries unknowen
(ib., 1481). In nombre undesired (ib., 1495). Yf . . . eny
persone unassigned take uppon hym to ... (ib.). For othir
wise might he never accomplissh his desire unknowen (Three
Kings' Sons, 1500). Charity out of a pure heart, and of a
good conscience, and of faith unfeigned (Auth. Vers., I
Tim., I: 15). By the Holy Ghost, by love unfeigned (Auth.
Vers., II Cor., VI: 6). Thou wentest in to men uncircum-
cised, and didst eat with them (Acts, 11: 3). He stood up,
holding forth his hand ungloved (New All.). Seeds unplaced
(Bacon, Of Atheism). A hundred pieces of gold uncoined
(Crusoe). Mimicking distresses unfelt (Rambler). By facts
uncontested (ib.). His heart . . . throbbing with desires unde-
fined (Esmond). Colour ungradated is wholly valueless
62
(Two Paths, Appendix V). The prisoner went down, with
some fellow-plotter untracked, in the Dover mail (Two Cities).
No extras, no vacations, and diet imparallelled (Nickleby).
A creed unchanged (Xavier). Latin unaltered (Abbott, Shakesp.
Gram.). Latch-keys and license unlimited (Light that failed).
They will continue to the end of time a constellation undi-
vided, a literary Gemini (Watkin, Pref. to R. de Coverly).
Appealing to gods or devils unseen (Winds. Mag., June, 1910).
104. With some words formed of un- and a past participle
postposition seems to have become the nearly settled rule
in Mod. Engl., at least in certain combinations:
The well of English undefiled (Morris, Introd. to
Chaucer). I am as innocent as the babe unborn (Floss).
As helpless as the babe unborn (Two Years Ago). You
are guiltless as the child unborn, and I love you (Ouida,
Umilta). «Of noble touch », i. e. of true metal unalloyed
(Warburton; Verity, Corilanus; Notes). Fear unalloyed is a
a painful passion (Bain, Rhetoric and Compos.). For we
here are in God's bosom, a land unknown (New Atlantis).
I signed it <your friend unknown* (Sheridan, Rivals, I: 1).
M:lle L'Espanaye had been throttled to death by some
person or persons' unknown (Poe, Murder in the Rue Morgue).
A young forester, a youth unknown (New Forest). Keneu
introduced to Dick some man unknown who would be
employed as war artist (Light that failed).
Chapter VII.
Adjectives ending in -ib/e, -able, -ant, -ent
105. I now proceed to a group of adjectives which on
account of their form or signification bear great resemblance
63
to verbal participles. Such are, on the one hand those in
-ible and -able, on the other hand those in -ant and -ent.
Just as we can say: «There is no evil unpunished*, in 106.
:the sense of: Every evil is punished, in like manner we can
say: «There are no people visible* = & No people are [to be]
-seen. So it will be justifiable to maintain that 'visible'
partakes of a verbal character. Moreover, this word, as
well as others in -ible, -able, is formed from a verbal stem.
In the same way, «There are strange customs pre-
valent* can be changed into: Strange customs prevail.
Thus also, I, Henry IV, II: 4: Is there no virtue extant?,
which means: «Does no virtue exist?».
It is also well-known that words like 'prevalent', 'extant'
:are at bottom nothing but present participles.
It is obvious that these are the reasons why adjectives
in -ible, -able, -ant, and -ent are so frequently placed after
.their head-words.
A. Adjectives in -able or -ible.
1. Instances with adj. in -able, -ible in a [semi-] 107.
•verbal function:
The Meyre ... at all tyme covenable dud his due
parte (Cov. Leet B., 1451). Emended or otherwise reformed
.at eny tyme behovabull (ib., 1480). - He practised it with
the easiest address imaginable (Wakefield). At these words
Barnabas fell a-ringing with all the violence imaginable
<Fielding, Andrews). The prettiest distress imaginable (Rivals).
The smallest thing imaginable (Verity, Mids. Night; Notes) 1;
1 But 'conceivable' usually precedes: With every conceivable nost-
rum (Esmond). This duty to which the strongest conceivable promptings
call (Verity, Hamlet; Intr.). The rudest conceivable attempts at history
(Earle and Plummer, Sax. Chron.; Introd.). He never seems to have
a moment's doubt on any conceivable question (M:c Carthy, Own
Times; N. E. D.).
64
The only people visible were one or two University
students (Westm. Gaz., Aug. 5, 1Q02). In the most pleas-
ant form practicable (Kath. Laud; Poutsma). I've shot
and hunted every beast, I think, shootable and huntable
(Kingsley, Two Years Ago). The most primitive language
accessible. - - In all hast possibull (Cov. Leet B., 1435, and
passim). In all haste possible (Malory, Arthur; 1480). He
and his feliship in alle Haste possible entrid ther-yn (Three
Kings' Sons; 1500. This phrase was evidently a standing
expression.). The first remedy is to remove, by all means
possible, the material cause of sedition (Bacon, Of Sedit-
ions and Troubles). In the fullest and firmest manner pos-
sible l (Crusoe). Mr. Esmond . . . chose to depart in the
most private manner possible (Esmond). The most perfect
representation possible of colour, light, and shade (Two
Paths). Not with the most composed countenance possible
(Nickleby). The most emphatic tone of amazement possible
(Pickwick). In those days respectability fed at home, but
one resort possible there was - - an eating-house . . . be-
hind St. Clement Danes (P. Kelver). 2
As the reader will have noticed, the substantive in
every one of the above quotations is at the same time
qualified by a superlative or an equivalent word ('only',,
'all', 'any', 'one'), and it is exactly in such cases that the
verbal character is most predominant. 3 The meaning would
1 MATZNER says (p. 295): >Das Adjektiv possible ist eigentlich
eine Satzverkiirzung», which is a convenient explanation, but hardly
anything more.
- But. when 'possible' is more adverbial and unstressed: The
brightest possible little fire (Pickwick). The worst possible port-wine
at the highest possible price (ib.). With blue wandering eyes under
the blackest possible eyebrows and hair (Marcella). The utmost pos-
sible distance (Shaw, Candida). With the smallest possible stretch of
fancy (Chatto and Windus, Slang Diet.; Preface).
3 Cf. § 53: The best man living, The only person sleeping, etc..
65
indeed often be another if the adj. were put before the
noun.
But it is not necessary that the substantive should 108.
be qualified by a superlative word, for an adjective in
-ible (-able) to have a verbal import, as appears from the
following quotations:
Payments which should be used to increase the stock
of books available (C. S. Fearenside, Mod. Sprak, VII, 1909;
b to be used). The conclusions attainable (= to be attain-
ed) are generally too vague (Sir H. Holland, Recollections
of Past Life).
2. In older English, however, a postpositive adjective 109.
in -able without any verbal force is not rarely met
with. Still such phrases are generally to be considered as
direct borrowings from the French.
Examples: Withouten any entent decevable (Chaucer,
Test, of Love). The residue of all my goodes mevable y
yeve and be-quethe to Alice Whitman my wif (E. E. Wills,
R. Whyteman; 1428). All his other godes and stuffes
mevable (E. E. Wills, Sir R. Rochefort; 1439). l At prys
resonable (Godfrey of Boh, 1481). Orlesse he knowe cause
resonable of his resorte hider (Cov. L. B., 1495). Without
he can shewe cause resonable (ib.). Withoute cause or
matter resonable (ib., 1481). ~ There is but lytil londe gayn-
able (Godfrey of Bol., 1481. Fr. gaingnables, capable of
being cultivated). Comien of pasture to their bestes comin-
able (C. L. B., 1480). As well as other Catell comenable
(ib.). She sholde purveye therto of a remedy covenable
(Blanch, and Egl., 1489).
The following are probably solely imitations of these:
1 Cf. Ses biens meubles et immeubles (Balzac, Fern me de
30 Ans).
2 On the other hand: A reasonable somme of money (C. L. B.).
Ye shall have a reasonable censure (ib.).
5
66
The preiudyce of her pryde dampnable (Blanch, and
Egl., 1489). A sacrifice acceptable, well-pleasing to God
(Auth. Vers., Phil. IV: 18). There are no terms negotiable
as between Government and Government (Times; Poutsma).
- In Scott I find: I think thy modesty might suppose that
were a case possible (Kenilworth).
no. 3. Adjectives in -able or -ible and negatived by un-
or in- are also very often placed after the noun. They
are never verbally tinged, so we must here resort to anal-
ogy where the phrase is not a direct borrowing l. But
there is another reason too: the adjectives in question are
always heavily stressed; and it has been held forth already
that emphasis has something to say in respect of word-
order. The substantive is here always in the indefinite
form.
Examples: But chaffis he shal brenne wi{) fur un-
quenchable (Wycliffs Bible, Math. Ill: 2). O weight un-
measurable, o see intransnatable (De Imit. Christi, 1440).
Hit shal be occasyon of a love inseparable betwyx her and
you (Blanch, and Egl., 148Q). Colde caused thrughe a hete
intollerabyll (ib.). And the chaff he will burn with fire
unquenchable (Auth. Vers., Luke 3: 17; cf above!). Sick
of the Philosophers stone, a disease uncurable (Earle, Micro-
cosmographie; 1628). She spoke the last words with
a smile, and a softness inexpressible (T. Jones). With a
sensibility inexpressible (Andrews). Who . . . finds difficul-
ties insuperable for want of ardour sufficient to encounter
them (Adventurer). It is often occasioned by accidents ir-
reparable (Rambler). It will give me joy infallible to find
Sir Lucius worthy (Sheridan, Rivals). With awe unspeakable
(Sartor). Consider . . . what benefits unspeakable all ages and
sexes derive from clothes (ib.). There is a power irresistible
As in: A fistula is... one ulcus undesiccable (Fistula).
67
impelling all of us (Duval). Filling his mind with alarm
undefinable (Esmond). Proofs of love and kindness inestim-
able (ib.). Which are in fact mines inexhaustible of elo-
quence (Opium-eater). Wars and revolutions innumerable
(R. Haggard, Dr. Therne). Then followed a scene of hor-
ror indescribable (R. Haggard, Jess.). Only through the
curious processes of my own mind did it raise an obstacle
insurmountable (King's Mfrror). Since Torpenhow used
contempt untranslatable, it will never . . . (Light that failed).
Shame unspeakable (Two Years Ago).
B. Adjectives in -ant, -ent.
Where an adjective in -ant or -ent is postpositive ill.
it is always [semi-] verbal, l 'present' occupying a place
of its own. As to 'adjacent' I refer, however, to § 87.
1. Other adjectives than 'present'. 112.
Examples: As hit appearith the V leffe precedent
(= which precedes this, cf. p. 50; Cov. L. B., 1430). WiJ) all
o/jlr houses pertinent (= that belong here; Capgrave, St.
Gilbert; 1451). In the contrees adiacent (Godfrey of Bol.,
1481; cf. adjoining!). Upon payne of every Brother absent
a li. of wax (Ordin. of the Gild of St. Katherine, 1494;
T. Smith, English Gilds). Such matter as must here be
revealed and treated of might endanger the circulation of
any Journal extant (Sartor; cf. existing!). The earliest Eng-
lish play extant. 2 You have heard, of course, the many
1 Of course not in : Every man that is in the Route defendant
(Cov. L. B., 1534), where the italicized expression is obviously a direct
French borrowing.
2 But also, when less stressed: The only extant translation dates
from 1608 (Verity, Hamlet; Introd.). -- And without any verbal im-
port: The Court of Love . . . the extant Romaunt of the Rose, are
also... ascribed to Chaucer (Morris, Chaucer; Intr.).
68
stories current, about money buried (Poe, Gold-bug). By
this time Edward's continual calls had aroused the people
of the house, and also of the cottages adjacent (New For-
est). One whose peregrinations had been confined to the
New Forest and the town adjacent (ib.). Some squireen of
the parts adjacent (Two Years Ago) *. His shrugs at ...
the pronunciation prevalent had almost ... (E. Harrington).
We seem, however, to have no verbality in: Emman-
uel resolved to make at a time convenient (cf. the only
time convenient!) a war (Bunyan, Holy War).
2. Present.
113. As to the word 'present', usage prescribes, for the
sake of clearness, that it should always be placed after
the noun when not denoting time, except in the one ex-
pression « Present company always excepted»2, where it
is more universal, more indefinite, and, consequently, less
verbal than ever.
Examples: If you speak as you thinke, these gentle-
women present have little cause to thank you (Euphues).
Looking round at the strangers present (Nickleby). At those
times they quietly spoke of Lucie, and of her father then
present Two Cities). He had felt it . . ., though as strong
as any man present (Meredith, Belloni). Rose now in-
timated her wish to perform the ceremony of introduc-
tion between her aunt and uncle present and the visitors
to Beckly Court (E. Harrington).
In Middle English it may occasionally be found after
its substantive also when it has a temporal sense: Forced
1 Therefore, when KKUGER, Syntax § 2283, declares: »Adjektiv -r
one klingt nach Umgangssprache. In der hoheren Sprache umgeht
man es durch ... one-}- Adj.», and in support of this cites inter alia:
Many of these rooms had doors which led into the one adjacent, he is,
of course, making an unhappy mistake.
- KRUGER, Syntax § 287.
69
I am at this houre present, syth . . . (Blanch, and Egl.,
1489).
Appendix. Adjectives in -ate.
In older English, inversion is sometimes used also 114.
with adjectives in -ate. These adjectives are not verbal in
meaning, but certainly in form.
Examples: Som-tyme pe sperme go]) oute by J)e hole
of pe serde infistulate (Fistula; ab. 1400). Unlike is {)e
savour ... of light increate and light illuminate (De Im. Chri-
sti, 1440). It wol be late or J)ou be a man illuminate (ib.).
The postposition in the following is due to special
reasons to be dealt with in § 119: A thousand carriages
come tumbling in with food and other raw produce inani-
mate or animate, and go tumbling out again with produce
manufactured (Sartor).
Chapter VIII.
Due.
The word 'due' is, properly speaking, a past parti- 115.
ciple. It is therefore still put after the noun in cases where
it reminds us of its verbal origin, i. e. in the signification
of «falling to be paid» \ as in: Payment for money due,
Debts due and owing.
In the signification of «appropriate», on the other
hand, where its verbal character has been totally obscur-
ed, 'due' is always placed before the noun: In due time,
To behave with due gravity, With all due respect.
1 ANN AMiALi:, Concise Engl. Diet.
70
Chapter IX.
'Necessary' and 'needful'.
116. We have seen that the participle « needed > - among
others - - is not usually placed after its head-word because
it does not denote an action in the same sense as most
transitive verbs; it rather implies passivity than the con-
trary. Thus it comes very near to an ordinary adjective,
i. e. it expresses something more permanent or univer-
sal. But it may happen - - as has been indicated in § 40
that such participles do express something more limit-
ed. This is the case above all when the substantive is
qualified by a superlative or 'all1, 'only', etc. Compare:
The needed implement, and: The first implement needed,
the only implement needed.
The adjectives 'necessary' and 'needful' are of a simi-
lar meaning to 'needed', so there may be cases where
they have something verbal in them, namely under the
circumstances just mentioned. By consequence it is not
so very astonishing that postposition is met with now and
then, especially after 'one' ('only').
Examples: As afore this tyme have be used at all
tymes nedefull (Cov. Leet B., 1480). He was . . . endoc-
tryned of the names and usages for the moost parte of
thabylymentes necessary (Blanch, and Egl., 148Q). For
man's well-being, Faith is properly the one thing needful
(= that man needs; Sartor). I do not possess the kind of
information necessary, I do not possess the kind of intelli-
gence (Two Cities). My mother praised me when I was
good, which was to her the one thing needful (P. Kelver).
'Requisite' as in the following quotations might perhaps be said
to form a parallel: To open the gate at tymes and season requysite
(Cov. L. B., 1470). At eny tyme requisite (ib., 1480).
71
Chapter X.
Postposition of two attributes connected with each
other by means of 'and', or 'or'.
A. If two (or more) adj. attr. connected with each 117.
other by means of 'and', or 'or', are placed after a noun,
the motive is very often that they are, or were originally,
added as an afterthought. I insert «were originally*
because in some cases a standing expression has arisen,
so that the attributes are now integral parts of the utterance.
As a rule, the substantive is in the indefinite form.
A comma is sometimes put in after the substantive; this
only makes the parenthetic character of the attributes still
more marked. «Both . . . and» («either . . . or») could often
be added without any change of meaning.
1. General examples: 118.
Onweg aworpenum Cristes geoce fiam leohtan and
/jam swetan (Bede). Many paleys real and noble (Trevisa;
Milliner). In a prison voul and stinkinde (Ayenb., 1340).
1?is bye}) gaveleres (usurers) kueade and voule (ib.). In
the name of God glorious and almyghty (Maundeville;
Matzner, p. 56Q). And witte J)ou J)at if J>e ferseid pacient
sende out blode blak and pikke and stynkyng, ]>at J)is
flowyng is no^t to be restreyned (Fistula; ab. 1400). Eat
made a feste grete and costios unto ]:>e weddyng of a son
of his (Alph. of Tales; 15th cent.). A benefactonr holy and
gode, of whom we have receyved all good Binges (De
Imit. Christi, 1440). After this lyf short and transytorye
all we may atteyne to come to the everlastyng lyf in heven
(Godfrey of Bol., 1481; Prol.). Without a cause goode or
raysonable (Blanch, and Egl., 148Q). But I my-self have seen
and can shew you bybles fayre and old writen in englishe
(Th. More, Dial, concernynge Heresy; 1528). They hunted
72
lions, liberdes, and suche bestis, fierce and savage (Th. Elyot,
Governor). It never could be that Agnes the pure and
gentle was privy to this conspiracy (Thackaray, Philip).
Six horses to her carriage, and servants armed and mounted
following it (Esmond). The dawning Republic one and in-
divisible { (Two Cities). Pain, new-born and insistent, for
her mother, her father, and herself (Marcella). The candy-
striped pole which indicates nobility proud and ancient
(Puddn'head Wilson). Eternal youth, infinite passion, pleas-
ures subtle and secret (D. Gray). Arts feminine and irre-
sistible encompassed him (E. Harrington). Sort of lake
green and winding, with nice quiet swims all about (Punch).
119. 2. Particular notice should be given to the case
where two adjectives of opposite meanings are added
to one substantive.
Examples: God delyvere us from alle evyl of synne
prevy and apert - (Wycliff, Paternoster). First, table-clothis,
towelles longe and shorte, covertours and napkyns (Early
Engl. Meals and Manners). Ewers with water hole or colde,
as tyme of the yere requirith (ib.). She proceeded to praise
Mr. Lovelace's person, and his qualifications natural and
acquired (Clarissa). Publications periodical and stationary
(Carlyle, Ess.- on Scott). With food and other raw produce
inanimate or animate (Sartor). Every one of her Lady-
ship's remedies spiritual or temporal 3 (Vanity Fair). Whom
neither . . . nor voices plebeian or patrician favoured (Es-
mond). English Rational and Irrational (Fitzedward Hall.
Book title). Don't quote from « Anecdotes, New and Old»,
interrupted Adela unkindly (God in the Car). It surrounded
him with friends new and old (Robertson, Hist, of Engl.
1 Possibly a direct imitation of the French.
2 Thus also in 15th century German, e. g. Wiser Ititen gelerter
und ungelerter (Hellwig, p. 113).
3 Cf., however, Lords spiritual, Lords temporal.
73
Lit.). The greatest of all writers ancient or modern (ib.).
The constant mention or introduction of ballads old and new
is a marked feature of the Elizabethan drama (Verity, Tw.
Night; Notes). Playgoers young and old will learn with
regret that Mr. Ch. Groves has utterly broken down in
health (The People, 4 July, 1Q09). Forgetfulness of trou-
bles past and imminent (E. Harrington). In fashions origi-
nal or imitative (ib.). Birds black and white (Sweet, N.
E. Or.). A collection of wax figures of celebrities past and
present (Moren-Harvey). An English Grammar Past and
Present (Nesfield). A New English Grammar Logical and
Historical (Sweet). The recent numbers of various econom-
ical journals, English and foreign (Marcella).
B. In the last three quotations the postposition may 120.
.also be due to the averseness to accumulating too
many qualifiers before one noun. This seems to have
been the reason in the following:
Your trewe frendes olde and wise (Chaucer, Melibeus;
Milliner). Every conseil honeste and profitable (ib.). Many
sekenez aduste and corrupte (Fistula; ab. 1400). And
there-in were all maner of serpentes and wylde bestes foul
and horryble (Morte Darthur, 146Q). Thies letters writen,
he called a messangere right wise and discrete and delyver-
ed them unto hym (Three Kings1 Sons, 1500). Their pe-
culiar manners and customs, with other matters very curi-
ous and useful (Gulliver). An elderly butler, English and
well-trained, took his master's hat (Xavier). A forlorn blue
ribbon, soiled and frayed (Cardinal's Snuff-box). Second
Edition revised and enlarged.
Thus I also account for the word-order in the fol-
lowing quotations, which do not, however, strictly be-
long here:
Lyft is lichamlich gesceaft swyde pynne (Wright, Pop.
Treat.; Matzner). Many other barons moche worshipful
74
(Godfr. of Bol., 1481). We that have so many things truly
natural that induce admiration (New Atl. Cf. also §lQOff),
Eight tall men likewise armed l (Scott). Twenty other gent-
lemen .... in Lincoln green a little coarser- (Nickleby).
121. C. It may also happen that two (or more) attri-
butes united have much more weight in the sen-
tence than the noun itself, whereas the latter is hardly
anything - - from a logical point of view — but an almost
superfluous frame on which the attributes must rest (cf.
«you silly creature», where 'creature' adds nothing to the
meaning!). That such is really the case is proved by the
fact that the noun can often be replaced by « something^
or can simply be left out, so that the adjectives become
predicative. Sometimes the subst. has been mentioned
immediately before.
The attributes here are then emphatic and frequently
equivalent to a phrase with < both . . . and» (»either . . . or»)T
and postposition is therefore used. ;i It is very easy for
anybody to ascertain that the emphasis will be considera-
bly lessened, one might say totally annihilated, if the word-
order is altered in the following numerous instances:
God is juge stalworfte, rygtful and suffrand (the same
as: God is stal worth etc.; Early Engl. Psalter; Anglos,
Reader). Cneoris ftweoru and forcerredu (Merc. Hymns, A,
S. Reader). A venym ulcus is in whom aboundiji venym
sutil and liquid (Science of Cir., 1380). The duchemen,
1 The postpositive attribute may, however, be appositional here.
- The phrase <a little* may, of course, often be awkward if the
attribute qualified by it is placed before the substantive. Hence the
transposition in: I shall know to recompense a devotion a little im-
portunate, my lord (Esmond).
3 Thus sometimes even in Swedish: Ett verk skapadt for ar-
hundraden, ett verk stort, hanforande, dgnadt att ... (Sv. Dagbl., 17
Jan. 1911. Ett storre antal personer -- och personer, mera olika, mera
naturtrogna (Sydsv. D., 11 Febr. 1911). Notice the rep. of the subst.!
75
whiche ben a peple rude and hardy, sawe this glorye
(= who are rude and hardy; Godfrey of Bol., 1481). I
knowe you to be a man wyse, resonable, and of good
wille (ib.). They might unnethes opyn their mowthes, but
as folkes ded and transitory (Three Kings' Sons, 1500).
Although one be al, have that one ben most disobedient
to me in a request lawful and reasonable (Euphues). And
yit is it holde for a dede allowable and vertuose that worn-
men were coverchefis (Pecock, Represser). The King etern-
al, immortal, invisible, the only wise God (Auth. Vers., I,
Tim. I: 17). And now was it a day gloomy and dark
(Bunyan, H. War). Fuel ... to flames insatiate and devour-
ing (Clarissa). There is more pleasure in an innocent and
virtuous life, than in one debauched and vicious (Tom Jo-
nes). A man uneducated and unlettered 1 (Adventurer). A
style clear, pure, nervous, and expressive (ib.). He that is
carried forward by a motion equable and easy perceives
not . . . (Idler). Establishing their authority over minds
ductile and unresting (Rambler). The new development
of those powers, though a development natural, inevitable,
and to be prevented (Macaulay, Hist.). I, for my part,
only remember a lady weak, and thin, and faded, who . . .
(Philip)'. Its use for purposes vain or vile (Two Paths).
What could be seen was of a nature singular and ex-
citing (Poe, Hans Pfaal). The whole character of that
bold address became invested with a something preter-
natural and inspired (Rienzi). The easy humour
had changed into a vein ironical, cynical, and severe (ib.).
In the humblest grades of art there were men younger, or
more fortunate, or more preferred (Ouida, Fame). Musical
bells chimed softly from the hall below, an octave deep
and sonorous and pleasing, like the chimes from an Italian
1 Cl, however, Ch. VI.
76
campanile (Xavier). It had been a death swift, silent, vio-
lent, terrible (Ouida, Pipistrello). I led a life noisy and
joyous, and for ever in movement (ib.). «Snakes?» says
Mary. «Yes, Mary; but these were snakes spiritual and
metaphorical* (Kingsley, Two Years Ago). « Forgive me,
Glory !» he was saying, in a voice tremulous and intense
(Christian). In other words, a purse long and liberal (Mer-
edith, E. Harrington).
We cannot, however, class among these such expressions as:
«It is cheating pure and simple* ', where the two adjectives united
form an adverbial adjunct, or: The sticklers for English pure and un-
defiled (P. Kelver), which has come to be a set phrase.
122. D. What has been said above applies with still more
reason to the case of an unstressed noun being modi-
fied by two weighty attributes, one or both of
which preceded by an adverb. It would indeed be
impossible not to lay some stress on the substantive if it
were put after the adjectives; so these would thereby lose
most of their emphasis.
Examples: Yet would I not have parents altogether
precise, or too severe (Euphues). Socrates, who refused to
save his life by disobeying the magistrate, yea a magistrate
most wicked and unjust (Florio). Characters extremely good,
or extremely bad, are seldom justly given (Clarissa). Symp-
toms of a spirit singularly open, thoughtful, almost poetical
(Sartor Res.). To which they added an expression almost
corpse-like and unearthly (Qu. Durward). «Nay>, said Ade-
line, in a voice singularly sweet and clear (Rienzi). A tract
of country excessively wild and desolate (Poe, Gold-bug).
The impulses of a heart originally just and good (Opium-
eater). The stars shone out, though with a light unusually
dim and distant (ib.). She was a woman very pure and
1 This mode of expression is a direct borrowing from the French.
Cf. Qu'est-ce que tout cela, si ce n'est de la chimie pure et simple
(Flaubert, M:me Bovary).
77
very honest (Pipistrello). Ali the warm expressions of a
heart naturally kind and generous (Venetia). He or she
will end in believing evil of folk very near and dear (Plain
Tales). It is in the domain of mezzo-tint that he holds
a place quite unique and commanding (Studio, Oct. 1Q10).
Also when the adverb is 'most' or 'less': I cannot 123.
call to mind where I have heard words more mild and
peace/all (Milton, Areopagitica). Of a size more large and
robust (Gulliver). With miseries more dreadful and afflictive
(Johnson, Rambler). In terms less acrimonious and unfair
(Thackaray, Philip).
Chapter XI.
Postposition of a single attribute preceded by
a quantitative adverb.
When an emphatic attribute is preceded by a 124,
ponderous quantitative adverb it seems to be almost
the rule to use inversion when the noun is in the indefi-
nite form. Otherwise the emphasis becomes considerably
less than it should be. Two cases are to be kept apart:
A. The adjective is more strongly stressed than
the adverb.
The adverbs here used are most often 'almost', 'well- 125.
nigh', 'quite', 'truly', 'full', and some others.
Examples: An oj)re }}et is zenne wet grat, {)et is
felhede (fierceness) of herte (Ayenb.; 1340). This bataylle
endured wel an houre al hoole (Godf. of Bol., 1481). The
palays and the cyte were . . . replenyssed wyth sorowe ful
byttir (Blanch, and Egl., 1489). With a contenaunce full
78
sadde, more than ever she was byfore (ib.). He entre herde
the cryes fill piteouse of a rnayden (ib.). All your scruples,
you see, have met with an indulgence truly maternal from
me (Clarissa). The Comfort he draws from ... is a sen-
timent truly Diabolical (Addison, Spectator, Febr. 23, 1712).
A barrier almost Impassable l separates him from the com-
missioned officer (Macaulay, Hist.). The multitude . . . attrib-
uted to him a prescience almost miraculous (ib.). He was
surrounded by pomp almost regal (ib.). With a strength
quite surprising (Durward). Long-drawn chirpings and
activity almost superhirundine (Sartor). Here also we have
a Symbol well-nigh superannuated (ib.). A coolness from
business, an indolence almost cloistral (Elia). Turned to-
wards Byronism with an interest altogether peculiar (Car-
lyle, Ess. on Scott). I perceived that it had grown to a
pallor truly fearful (Poe, W. Wilson). This one has . . .
a weight altogether irresistible L (Poe, Mystery of Marie
Roget). With a rolling gait altogether indescribable1 (Twist).
An expression of villainy perfectly demoniacal (ib.). A fi-
delity which he returned with an ingratitude quite Royal
(Esmond). Turner appears as a man of sympathy absolutely
infinite (Ruskin, Pre-raphaelitism). As the synonym for
rectitude in dealing quite old-fashioned (P. Kelver). But
do not despise a virtue purely Pagan (E. Harrington).
Without a title or money he was under eclipse almost total
(ib.). A bill was presented ... for a sum quite preposterous
(Wide World Mag., Sept. 1010).
126. Also the adverb 'most' belongs to this section. LOUISE
POUND says (Comp. of Adj. in Engl. in the XV and the
XVI cent., § 88; Anglistische Forschungen) without
any restriction or explanation! — as to the postposition of
an attribute preceded by 'most': «The order exemplified by
Cf., however, Ch. VII, A.
79
Ascham's a virtue most noble ... is common in both the
fifteenth and the sixteenth centuries, especially in the latter
part of the 16th». This word-order is not, however, un-
usual in Modern English either, in case the attribute is
emphatic and the noun in the indefinite form, that is.
Examples: Danaus whome they report to be the
father of fiftie children, had among them all but one that
disobeyed him in a thing most dishonest l (Euphues). He
multiplieth in brother-hood, a thing most singular *, and a
lonely one (Florio). There are certaine by-wayes and deep-
flows most profitable, which we should do well to leave
(ib.). What is heaven? A place and state most blessed,
because God dwelleth there (Pilgr. Progr.). Accusation
was formally preferred and retribution most signal was
looked for (Elia). O outcast of all outcasts most abandoned
<Poe, W. Wilson). It was a stain that can never be effaced
a deed most diabolical, and what we thought would
call down the vengeance of Heaven (New Forest). What
if the Cogglesby Brewery proved a basis most unsound
(E. Harrington). A man most enviable (ib.). My thanks
to you most sincere (ib.). - Also: That is the term most
suitable, inasmuch as ... (Pearson's Mag., Jan. 1Q10).
Where 'most' is preceded by the def. art. one would 127.
feel inclined to take the whole for a direct imitation of the
French. This seems to me quite unnecessary, firstly be-
cause a real superlative in this case requires 'the' if it is
not to be misunderstood as a weaker form ('most' = Swed.
hogst»), secondly because the same construction can be
used in Swedish (e. g. «Ett forhallande det mest egen-
domliga, man kan tanka sig»), and thirdly because French
influence would not very likely have, stopped there.
Examples: A resolution the most momentous of his
1 Cf., however, Ch. XIII, L.
80
whole life (Macaulay, Hist.). Under circumstances the most
pathetic (Kenilworth). From circumstances the most singu-
lar dragged on to a precipice (ib.). Born in an age the
most prosaic ... in a condition the most disadvantageous
(Carlyle, Ess. on Burns). Cowardice the most abject and
selfish ! (Opium-eater). Friendship the most delicate and
love the most pure (Disraeli, Venetia). The extraordinary
interest ... for minds the most diverse (Verity, Tempest;
Introd.).
B. The adjective and the adverb ape both equally
emphatic.
128. Examples: For Jjon he waes se monn swide cefcest
(pious) (Caedmon; A. S. Reader). £is porcion turnyd in-to
a little fynger all bludy (Alph. of Tales; 15th cent.) Wise
men clepid he men gretly lerned, and on wise, simple ydiotis
(Capgrave, St. Augustine; Prol.; ab. 1450). A gentilman,
a knyght right noble, named Gaultier (Godfrey of Bol.,,
1481). The knyght ... is of byrth right hyghe (Blanch,
and Egl., 1489). They . . . made unmeasurable sorow, as
folkes utterly dispeired (Three Kings' Sons; 1500). Courage,
constancie, and resolution, means altogether opposite (Florio).
To forswear the full stream of the world, and to live in,
a nook merely monastic (As you, III: 2). In a hand scarce
legible (Milton, Areopagitica). Like a man perfectly confused
and out of myself, I came home (Crusoe). He had made
me several offers very advantageous, which, however, I
refused (Gulliver). I came from countries very remote of
which they never heard (ib.). He, I say, formed a conjec-
ture equally absurd (Wakefield). They have not, perhaps,
expected events equally strange, or by means equally inade-
quate (Rambler). Had they not happened to wound apart
Cf., however, Ch. X, D.
81
remarkably tender (ib.). Such fears argued a diffidence
and despondence very criminal (Andrews). It had infinitely
a stronger effect on him . . . an effect, however, widely dif-
ferent (T. Jones). The militia was an institution eminently
popular (Macaulay, Hist.). Some passages, which, to minds
strongly prepossessed, might seem to confirm the evidence
of Gates (ib.). Your passion transports you into a language
utterly unworthy. The hand of no gentlewoman can be
disposed of by force (Durward). The moon shed a full
sea of glorious light upon a landscape equally glorious
(ib.). I am not mad - I am but a creature unutterably
miserable (Kenil worth). Yet it is a difference literally im-
mense (Carlyle, Ess. on Scott). He makes a bow to the
doctor who replied by a salutation equally stiff (Duval).
A scholar who . . . bore the same Christian and surname
as myself, a circumstance, in fact, little remarkable (Poe, W.
Wilson). A man thoroughly great has a certain contempt
for his kind while he aids them (Rienzi). The printed re-
port gave « excellent » design (that is to say, design excellently
good), which I did not mean (Two Paths). With a fore-
sight and prudence highly commendable (Nickleby). Many
exotic plants have pollen utterly worthless (Darwin, Origin).
This incident I look back upon with feelings inexpressively
profound (Opium-eater). Those years had been steeped in
the sense of a lot irremediably hard (Floss). When a tem-
porary gust of feeling carried her into an emotion unex-
pectedly strong (King's Mirror). The glass showed her a
rosy face, and arms and shoulders superbly white (Xavier).
Some of them . . . proffered an assistance entirely unneces-
sary with an emphasis absolutely unnecessary (ib.). He was
roused from his reverie by an altercation unmistakably fierce
(E. Harrington). We have privileges equally enviable (ib.).
The Critic has been once or twice revived in days com-
paratively recent (Introd. to Plays of Sheridan; World's
82
Classics). There might be rejoinders equally subtle (Molloy,
Shall and Will). *
129. This also applies to an adjective preceded by 'more'
or 'less', as these are quantitative adverbs as good as any
and can be emphasized.
Examples with 'more': That he shold enclose them
in a place more strayt, that they shold not renne in to the
contre (Godf. of Bol., 1481). Here's metal more attractive
(Hamlet, III: 2). Other societies possess written Constitu-
tions more symmetrical 2 (Macaulay, Hist.). You cannot derive
it from a source more worthy, answered Toison d'Or (Dur-
ward). Some of lower education, or a nature more brutal,
saw only . . . (ib.). Aid more seasonable (Opium-eater). If
I were you, I should feel myself in a danger more delightful
(King's Mirror). Perhaps it would support an interpretation
. more subtle (ib.). No scene of contrasts more picturesque could
have been discovered or imagined (Xavier). Prince Arthur
had no friend more enthusiastic (ib.). An influence more
potent refrained her (ib.). Rest more absolute could not
have been . . . (ib.). No salon of Paris had shown her a
figure more distinguished (ib.). Rome surely contained no
slum more fetid, none more perilous (Cardinal's Snuff-box).
They retreated . . . and went to other listeners more facile '2
(Ouida, Umilta). Another trouble awaited me, one more
tangible (P. Kelver).
Examples with 'less': If it had come from a person
less prejudiced (Clarissa). If it be detained by occupations
less pleasing it returns again to study (Rambler). Which,
in souls less enlightened, may be guiltless (ib.). A century
earlier, irritation less serious would have produced a general
rising (Macaulay, Hist.). The vacant seats were generally
1 Cf. also: He commended the services of somebody pretty high
(E. Harrington). We could not say «somebody high».
2 Cf., however, § 120.
83
filled with persons less tractable (ib.). Though with emo-
tions less stormy (Rienzi). Wearing a character less offens-
ive (Opium-eater). There were other functionaries less for-
tunate *, that night and other nights (Two Cities). Out of
other hands less scrupulous (New Forest).
With both 'more' and 'less': In a manner more or less satis-
factory (Durward; Introd.).
Appendix 1. 130.
The same word-order is sometimes observed also
where other kinds of adverbs are concerned, under the
circumstances mentioned.
Examples: To an extent elsewhere unknown (Macaulay,
Hist.). The understanding of a man naturally sanguine
may, indeed . . . (Rambler). A skin transparently pure (Dur-
ward). Who sometimes has with some . . . little nook of
literature an acquaintance critically minute (Opium-eater).
Authorities notoriously neutral (ib.). A case of the hybrid
offspring of two animals clearly distinct 2, being themselves
perfectly fertile (Darwin, Origin). With expressions subtly
various (King's Mirror). Complexions otherwise flawless are
often ruined . . . (Cosmopol. Mag., Oct. 1Q10).
As for attributes preceded by adverbs of time, see
the following chapter.
Appendix 2. 131.
In the older language postposition of an attribute
preceded by 'somewhat' was not uncommon. In ordinary
Present English this is not found, as 'somewhat' is never
emphatic.
Examples: It ought to bee a voluptuousnesse somewhat
circumspect and conscientious 3 (Florio). A counsel some-
what rash (ib.). You were better take for business a man
1 Cf., however, Introduction, §§ 11, 12, and § 120.
2 « Clearly distinct* italicized by Darwin!
3 Compare also § 122 and § 120.
84
somewhat absurd than over-formal (Bacon, Of Seeming Wise).
Rubb the neck well with a linnen napking somewhat course l
(E. E. Meals and Man., 1624). He came at a place some-
what ascending, and upon that place stood a cross (Pilgr.
Prog.). Domestics of a kind somewhat unusual (Gulliver).
A copy of the gospels somewhat mutilated, which . . .
(Johnson, Diet.).
The following is from Late Mod. Engl., but sounds
decidedly archaic: Wales . . . breeds a population somewhat
litigious (Opium-eater).
There was also another arrangement frequently used, namely:
It hath somewhat a sharp taste (Florio). Brick of somewhat a bluer
colour (New Atl.). In somewhat a humbler style (Sheridan, School for
Sc.). My gossip has somewhat an ugly favour to look upon (Durward).
Chapter XII.
Adjectives preceded by temporal adverbs.
132. It has been pointed out above (§ 98) that some hesitation
prevails with a view to placing a participle modified by a
temporal adverb before the noun. Also when the attribute
is an adjective proper we frequently meet with postposit-
ion in this case. The motive is, of course, another, as
adjectives in general cannot be said to be in the slightest
degree verbal, even if the notion of time is strong.
I have already hinted at the fact that the only cate-
gory of adverbs that did not entail inversion of noun and
attribute in older English was the quantitative. So we
naturally expect postposition there. But postposition is
also the rule in Modern English as soon as the adjective
and its temporal qualifier are to be emphasized at the
Compare also § 120.
85
cost of the substantive. Otherwise the latter deprives the
other two parts of speech of a great portion of their stress.
This rule may, by the way, also be applied to many of
the instances of the order noun + temp. adv. -f- part, given
in a previous chapter.
Examples: It is a quality ever hurtfull, ever sottish
(Florio). An insolent man is a fellow newly great, and
newly proud (Earle, Micro-cosm.; 1628). Unfurnished with
knowledge previously necessary (Adventurer). That Elizabeth
might enter the Castle by a path hitherto untrodden 1
(Kenilworth). With a precision before unexampled * (Rus-
kin). The remembrance of a home long desolate (Two Cities).
A boy living at the time then present (Mill on the Floss).
A yesterday already remote (Cardinal's Snuff-box).
Other motives (§ 120) may account for the transposit-
ion in the following: Some fair lady hitherto unknown (P.
Kelver). A harmonising attractiveness continually delightful
(Daily Mail, July 6, 190Q). An eminent English man of
letters now dead (King's Mirror).
When no emphasis is aimed at, postposition is not 133.
used in Mod. English:
He walked moodily some paces up the once populous
avenue (Poe, The Man of the Crowd). The hitherto irre-
proachable firm of Stillschweigen (Sartor). My once bright
prospects (D. Duval). A once predominant order (Darwin,
Origin). A new and sometimes very different character (ib.).
Costly and sometimes unhallowed sacrifices (Fullerton, Bon-
neval). That recently-despised but now welcome article of
costume (Floss). The yet green grapes (Ouida, Umilta).
The always cold, bleak North (Ouida, Birds in the Snow).
The then favourite game of tennis (Verity, Tempest; Notes).
The still active use (Chatto and Windus, Slang Diet.). An
ever fresh pleasure (Light that failed).
1 Cf., however, Ch. VI.
86
A hyphen between a prepositive adjective and its adverb is
occasionally found in the older language. This method may be look-
ed upon as an intermediate stage J.
Examples: You ever-gentle gods (Lear, IV: 6). The ever-praise-
worthy poesie (Sidney, Apologie). — Cf. also: Any directly-constant. . .
judgement (Florio).
Even as late as Dickens and Disraeli: The once-peaceful streets
(Two Cities). The still-distant huntsman (Venetia).
Chapter XIII.
Postposition of ordinary adjectives not qualified
by any adverb.
A. I begin this section with some doubtful cases,
namely those touching previous, next, last, and sufficient.
134. 1. Previous. It is indeed rather uncertain whether
'previous' is an adjective, and not an adverb, when it is
placed after a noun denoting time. In Middle English, in
Elizabethan English, and also in the living vulgar language,
there are numerous instances of an adjective being used
as an adverb without the ending -ly. It is then not im-
possible that we have to deal with a remnant of the older
idiom in the case of 'previous' put after its head-word.
'Previous' following a substantive of time means exactly
the same as the adverb 'before', just as 'previous to' is
equivalent to the preposition 'before'. - There is an in-
teresting parallel tending to corroborate this view in the
following examples:
1 A hyphen is still often used in Modern Engl. with some quan-
titative adverbs: That half-pleasurable... sentiment (Poe). A half-
polite, half-tender glance (Floss). With a half-angry gesture (Lady
Audley). The thrice-guilty principal (ib.). A half-frightened, half-
vacant sorrow (Harte, By Sedge and Shore).
87
A poor little wretch who had been awake half the
night before and many nights previous (D. Duval). The
pamphlet of yesterday, or the poem of the day previous,
or the scandal of the week before (Thackaray, Philip).
Further instances:
Mrs. B. had told him of the accident at supper on
the night previous (Duval). My little white dimity bed was
as smooth and trim as on the day previous (Van. Fair). In
1812..., as well as for some years previous, \ had been
chiefly studying German metaphysics (Opium-eater).
Perhaps the likeness in use to postpositive 'following', 'coming'
may also count for something.
2. Last and next. As regards Mast' and 'next', they 135.
might very well be dismissed as adverbs when placed
behind in expressions of time. So they are too in the
collocations last past, next coming (following, ensuing),
as in:
This very year last past (Two Cities). And crown her
Queen of England, ere the thirtieth of May next ensuing
(II, Henry VI, I: 1). At Esture next comyng (Cov. L. Book,
1421) l.
Even if we need not look upon postpositive Mast'
and 'next' as short for «last past», «next coming (follow-
ing, ensuing)», it is at any rate possible that the analogy
of these as well as of the simple postpositive 'past', 'com-
ing', etc. has at least contributed to the rise and propa-
gation of the word-order in modern Saturday last, Satur-
day next, etc.
One might also imagine, if 'last' and 'next' are not
adverbs here, that Saturday last (next) stands for Saturday
last (next) week, and that The 30th of May last (next)
stands for The 30th of May last (next) year (spring). Com-
For further instances, see § 89.
88
pare Latin proximo, ultimo. It looks as if that were the
case in: On Thursday evening last (Twist).
136. Postposition is frequent as early as the Middle Eng-
lish period.
Examples: XV li. at Esteren next, and X li. at Este-
ren come twelmonthe (E. E. Wills, 1417). To be yeven
be Michelmas day next (Cov. L. B., 1464). The matier
shuld be continied till Estur next (ib., 14Q3). On Wednes-
day next (Rich. II). Why did you not lend it to Alice
Shortcake upon All-hallowmas last (Merry Wives, I: 1).
You spit on me on Wednesday last (Merch. of Yen., I: 3).
On Black-Monday last at six o'clock (ib., II: 5). On Good-
Friday last (I, Henry IV, I: 2).
137. 3. Sufficient. It is quite apparent that 'sufficient' is
often at bottom an adverb when it has its place after its
head-word, a phenomenon frequently met with in older and
modern English, from the 15th century down to our days 1.
Examples: I had both scissors and razors sufficient
(Crusoe). There are already books sufficient in the world
(Johnson, Adventurer). He may find real crimes sufficient
to give full employment to caution or repentance (Rambler).
The gazetteers and writers . . . have given accounts suffic-
ient of that bloody battle (Esmond). Juliana at least had
hints sufficient (E. Harrington).
138. But it is nowise necessary always to have recourse
to such an explanation. 'Sufficient' may very well be an
adjective also when postpositive, having received its place
on the analogy of 'enough', which is not an adjective,
but an adverb (originally a noun probably). Since enough
company is the same as sufficient company, company suffic-
ient ought easily to be substituted for company enough,
one would think.
1 We cannot refer 'sufficient' to § 111 above, because it has
never anything verbal in it.
89
Thus 'sufficient' may be a real adjective, though it is
uncertain, in:
Then we shall have work sufficient, without any more
accrease (Florio). For want of ardour sufficient to en-
counter them (Adventurer). He had salary sufficient of the
state (New Atlantis). Any illness which left the patient
strength sufficient to walk about (Opium-eater). That will
be explanation sufficient (New Forest).
On the other hand it cannot well be an adverb in 139.
the following quotations:
f)ou shalt finde tyme sufficient and covenable. . . (Imit.
Christi, 1440). If the Vintners nose be at the doore, it is
a signe sufficient (Earle, Micro-cosm., 1628). Nor were the
rocks in the island of hardness sufficient, but all were . . .
(Crusoe). Sufficient indication, if no proof sufficient, re-
mains for us in his works (Carlyle, Ess. on Burns).
B. Square and Sterling-.
1. Square is often placed after 'foot'. KRUGER says 140.
(Syntax § 289): «Unterscheide six feet square = 6 Fuss
im Quadrat, 6 Fuss lang und 6 Fuss breit, von six square
feet, 6 Quadratfuss». This in other words means that
'square' is put after the noun only when used adverbially
(Swed. «i kvadrat»), not in an attributive function.
Postposition is not, however, used solely when the
expression is a predicative complement, as in: Each is
about forty feet square (Gulliver), but also in other com-
binations, e. g. A space of eight feet square (Ruskin), In
the space of a foot and a half square (Ruskin), The little
parlour, of some 12 feet square (Irving, Sketchbook).
Strictly speaking, «foot square» does not fall within
the compass of this treatise.
2. Pound sterling is short for Pound Easterling; so 141.
'sterling' is not, properly speaking, an adjective in this
90
collocation, although it has later on been apprehended as,
and has passed into, an adjective.
As a real adjective it does not, however, stand after
its substantive.
C. Postposition after 'with'.
142. In a phrase like He returned with his mind unchanged
'unchanged' is not, of course, an attribute, but predicative
in the same way as the participles in: Then Jack Hunter,
without a word said, sped across the marshes (H. Sutcliffe,
The Jolly Smugglers; Winds. Mag., May 1Q10), // was not
the first time he had borrowed a neighbour's horse without
leave asked (ib.); thus = He returned, his mind being-
unchanged, or: having his mind unchanged^.
In like manner, With prices affixed (where 'prices' stands
for «the prices », in accordance with the principles of the
advertising style) may be transcribed: The prices being
affixed.
Compare also: That is victorie indeed, which shall
be attained with credit unimpeached, and dignitie untainted
(= without impeachment of credit etc. Florio). I come with
no fame won, and no young vision realised (Twist).
143. In the following quotation the part, should be un-
derstood as a substantive (cf. § 50): With drums beating
and music sounding (= with beating of drums etc.). There
must be a battle, a brave, boisterous battle, with pendants
waving and cannon roaring (Audley).
144. Under the influence of such combinations the same
word-order is kept up also when the adj. or part, after
'with' is used attributively.
1 Such expressions are, of course, renderings of the Latin abla-
tive absolute, «without a word said* being equivalent to «with no
word said».
a) Very often it will be possible to explain the matter
simply by assuming omission of a poss. pron., so that
the adjective becomes properly speaking a predicative part
of the sentence. That the pronoun can be omitted is clear
from the following quotations:
With eyes fixed upon the spot where the carriage had
disappeared (Twist). My mother sat quite still, with eyes
intent on the floor (King's Mirror). With blood aflame (adv.!)
and face hot with anger, Sherlock strode from his hiding-
place (F. M. White, The Salmon Poachers; Winds. Mag.
July 1910).
No doubt it was so at first; French Les yeux fermes
was rendered by With eyes shut, where 'with' was thought
to correspond to Mes'. But it is hardly probable that the
adj. (or part.) is felt to be predicative now; otherwise one
would not combine the two different constructions, as in:
This good angel . . . v . . stood before him with keen
words and aspect malign (Esmond). With folded arms and
bodies half doubled (Twist). For nearly ten minutes he
stood there, motionless, with parted lips, and eyes strangely
bright (D. Gray).
At any rate, where a poss. pron. may be supposed 145.
to be omitted postposition is considered the best con-
struction. In Moderna Sprak VI, 1910, Mr. Fearenside cor-
rects a Swedish learner's A ship with set sails into « [better:]
sails set».
Examples: This yonge Davyd, with visage assured,
as he that abode the dethe . . ., seide to the Soudan yn
this wise . . . (Three Kings' Sons, 1500). Toothless, with
eies dropping, or crooked and stooping (Florio). Meagre
looking, with eies trilling, flegmatick, squalid, and spauling
(ib.). A small cherub of gold with wings displayed (New
Atlantis). He marched into Liege as a conqueror, with
visor closed (Durward). I think they wear helmets with
92
visors lowered (ib.). He turned toward Durward with mace
uplifted (ib.). As if he were . asleep with eyes open (Sartor).
While they waited with stomachs faint and empty, they be-
guiled the time by embracing one another (Two Cities).
He walked to and fro with thoughts very busy until it was
lime to return (ib.). Who, with prospects blighted, lingered
on at home (Twist). You gentle reader, with brain fully
grown, trained by years ... (P. Kelver). 'Winking', with
eyes shut (Verity, Henry V; Notes). Placid like a statue,
with cheeks a little hollower, and lips a little whiter (Merri-
man, -On the Rocks). «I should be proud of it», she said,
with head erect (King's Mirror).
146. b) On the other hand there can be no doubt as to
the attributive character of the adjective (or participle) in
the following quotations:
If he smyte with a swerd or a knyfe drawyn he schall
pay half a marke (Cov. L. B., 1421). Whereas he should
return with a mind full-fraught, he returns with a wind-
puft conceit (Florio). He is sent to the University, and
with great heart burning takes upon him the Ministry
(Earle, Micro-cosm.; 1628). I stored my boat with the car-
casses of 100 oxen and 300 sheep, with bread and drink
proportionable l (Gulliver). My aunt was there and looked
upon me as if with kindness restrained, bending coldly to
my compliment (Clarissa). We are, therefore, not to won-
der that most fail . . . with a mind unbiassed and with
liberty unobstructed (Rambler) 2.
147. Inversion in this case cannot, however, be said to
be in accordance with modern usage. In the following
examples from more recent times other motives have, I
think, determined the word-order:
A forked radish with a head fantastically carved
1 Cf., however, in proportion, and also § 109.
2 Participles are, of course, most liable to transposition.
93
(Sartor) l. With a hope ever darkening 2, and with . . . (Two
Cities). I heard him descending with steps slow and steady 3
(Opium-eater). The Doctor, with a countenance unusually
serious 3, offered her his arm (Venetia).
In the following quotations 'with' is omitted: She paused, mouth
open, eyes wide, listening (C. Carr, Votes for Women; Winds. Mag.
June 1910). At all events, eyebrows raised, face unsmiling, it was a
glance that . . . (Cardinal's Snuff-box).
D. Dear. Just as 'child' in: «A rich husband, Polly, 148.
child! and you are a lady ready made» (E. Harrington), is
a term of endearment or word to attract attention added
afterwards, in the same way 'dear' in «Come, Annie (,)
dear!» is a posterior supplement thought necessary for the
sake of better effect. DICKENS has: « Oliver, my dear, come
to the gentleman > (Twist), where 'dear' comes pretty near
to a noun. The similarity between the two modes of ex-
pression is thence obvious.
Postposition in such cases was the rule as early as 149.
the Anglo-Saxon period: Hroftgar leofa (Sweet). Men pa
leofestan (Blickl. Horn.; Milliner. «Anrede»). Hceleft min se
leofa (Elene; Kellner, Hist. Outlines). Mine gebroftra pa
leofostan (Aelfric's Horn.; Milliner). Broker min seleofosta
(ib.). Dohtor min seo dyreste (Juliana; Kellner).
Examples from later times: Thisby dear (Mids. Night). 150.
«My father !» she called to him. «Father dear» (Two Cities).
Maisie, dear, it sounds absurd (Light that failed). «Grace
dear», interposed her mother (Two Years Ago). I won't
leave you, uncle dear (G. P. Hawtrey, Pickpocket).
It is not in accordance with the modern idiom to use 151.
inversion also when the substantive is preceded by a pos-
sessive pronoun. But Shakespear has: Ah, Pyramus, my
lover dear (Mids. Night). Thisby dear, my lady dear (ib.).
1 Cf. Ch. v.
2 Cf. § 121.
3 Cf. § 130.
94
The following quotations should also be compared as parallels:
A ! traytour antrewe (=-. traitor, you untrue dog), sayd kyng Ar-
thur (Morte Darthur). -- You're tied up in a sack and made to run
about blind, Binkie-wee (= Binkie, my little dog. Light that failed).
E. Pliny the Elder, Charles the Great, and the like.
152. Phrases like Pliny the Elder, Charles the Great are
no special characteristics of English. They are common
to both ancient and modern languages, and the reason
of the postposition is simply that the adjectives were originally
appositions, i. e. explanatory additions, just as are the
nouns in: The difference between one the numeral and one
the pronoun is ... (Sweet, Gram.).
In older English nearly all appositions are placed after the head-
word, e. g. Ignatius bisc., Eoppa mcessepreost, Cometa se steorra,
On Hit pam ealonde (Kube, § 29). Honorius casere (Bede's Eccl.
Hist.). Fram Agusto pam casere (ih.).
153. In Anglo-Saxon such appositional adjectives could
even be separated from the noun by other parts of the
sentence, as in: Ond }>aer weard Sidroc eorl ofslaegen se
alda, and Sidroc eorl se gioncga etc. (Sax. Chron.).
154. Direct borrowings from the Latin are Asia Minor and
proper nouns + senior, junior, major (e. g. Fowler major
told me the yarn one day; J. Pope, Pym's Sister; Winds.
* Mag., June, 1910).
Other instances from older and more recent times:
Sidroc eorl se gioncga (Sax. Chron.). Bi {>am cuaed Salo-
monn se snottra (Cura Past.). Oswald se eadiga (Aelfr.
Horn., Milliner). Libye the hye, and Libye the lowe (Maun-
dev., Matzner). Ynde the lesse (ib.). Ermonye the litylle
and the grete (ib., Milliner). Peris Smyth the yongar (E. E.
Wills, 1411). A centre named danemarche the moyen l (God-
frey of Bol., 1481). Thence into Little Saffron Hill, and so
Fr. Danemarche la Maienne, Lat. Dacia mediterranea.
95
into Saffron Hill the Great (Twist). Amomma the outcast
because she might blow up at any moment -- brows-
ed, in the background (Light that failed).
F. Phrases borrowed or copied from the Latin.
1. Grammatical phrases.
It can hardly be doubted that nominative absolute and 155.
ablative absolute are descendants in a direct line of Latin
nominativus absolutus, ablativus absolutus.
And all other grammatical terms with a postpositive
adjective naturally go back to the same source. They have
passed into standing expressions and might therefore, from
a modern point of view, be regarded as compound words.
Examples: The persons plural keep the termination of
the first person singular (Ben Jonson). Nouns signifying
a multitude require a verb plural (ib.). The formation of
a participle passive from a noun is a licence . . . (Colle-
ridge, Table Talk). 'Strucken', the old participle passive
(Johnson, Diet. 1). We might take two years in getting
through the verbs deponent (Elia). It is separated from the
participle passive (Abbott, Sh. Gram.). « Progress », the
verb neuter (Fitzedw. Hall, Mod. Engl.). His verb active
«pleasure», and several similar forms, are archaisms (ib.).
English Imperfects Passive (ib.). Mostly after verbs intrans-
itive (Abbott), e mute, -ed sonant, h mute (ib.). Omission
of the subject relative (Verity, As you; Notes), m final.
In Late Modern English this word-order is not gen- 156.
erally used, except perhaps in the language of conserv-
ative latinizing grammarians.
It is somewhat uncertain whether we are to look upon the fol- 157.
lowing as imitations of the above: / short is decidedly secondary
1 Cited by G. LANNERT, An Investigation into the Lang, of R.
Crusoe, Uppsala 1910.
06
(Lloyd, North. Engl.). e short is the normal short printed e (ib.). e
long is not found quite pure in N.-Engl. (ib.). — We might indeed
be entitled to regard «i short» etc. as an abbreviation of «i, when it is
short», or «i, the short», so that the adjectives were either predicative
or appositional.
2. Biblical phrases.
158. God Omnipotent derives its origin direct from Lat.
Deas Omnipotens. The more- frequent form is, however,
the anglicized God Almighty (cf. Swed. »Gud allsmaktig»).
Examples from older English: Gode allmehtgum ond
J)ere halgon gesomnuncgae (Kent. Chart., Oswulf; A. S.
Reader). Gif daet donne God cellmcehtig geteod habbe
(Kentish Charters, Aelfred; ib.). Heora heortan . . . Gode
celmihtegum claene healden (Bede, Eccl. Hist.).
Normal word-order also occurs, according to KOCH
(Hist. Gram.) only in the vocative case; e. g. Almichte God
(Ancr. Riwle).
159. After «God almighty » had become practically a com-
pound word, people would say: Laverd godalmihtin (O.
E. Horn.; Milliner), and thence: Hlaford almihti (ib.); Saith
the Lord Almighty (Auth. Vers., II. Cor. VI: 18).
160. Imitations of the Latin are also to be seen in expres-
sions with a postpositive 'everlasting'.
Examples: Hi ssel become a welle })et him ssel do
Iheape (jump) in-to pe lyve everelestynde (Ayenb., 1340). Gret-
yng in God aylestand tyt yhure (to your) universite («Schott.
Schiedspr.», 1385: Kluge, Leseb.). Hayle fjerfore, o lufly lufe
everlastynge (Fire of Love; 1435). When pore to pes ever-
lastyng sal be borne (ib.). A crovne everlasting (De Imit.
Christi, 1440). Into the fire everlasting (ib.). Into ly fever-
lasting (ib.). Go to the fest everlastinge (ib.). l He be-
longed now to the world everlasting (John Hal.; Poutsma).
All Marsh folk have been smugglers since time everlasting
(Kipling, Puck).
1 But also (ib.): Everlastinge dampnacion, Everlastinge lif.
97
That the same word-order was kept also when A. 161.
S. 'everlasting' had been exchanged for Rom. 'eternal', is
still more intelligible.
Examples: And these shall go away into everlasting
punishment, but the righteous into life eternal (Matthew,
25: 46). x And this is life eternal, that they might know
thee the only true God (John, 17: 3). 1 That he might
know Christ Jesus, to know whom is life eternal (Crusoe).
Other biblical phrases: O Father Beneficent! strength- 162.
en our hearts (Thackaray, Philip). I know one that
prays . . . that the Eye all-seeing shall find you in the hum-
ble place (Esmond). Thus also: My goodness gracious
(Brown, V. C), where 'goodness' stands for 'God'.
He chose the church militant (T. Jones). A visible
Communion and Church Militant (Sartor). This . . . revealed it
as a Church militant and crusading (Opium-eater). Church
triumphant. 2 - Yes, that 'a did, and said they were devils
incarnate (Henry V, II: 1). «O, devils incarnate /» he yelled
(Ouida, A Hero's Reward). Also: A very light-ray incarn-
ate (Sartor). 3 The First Epistle General of John (Auth.
Vers.). The Second Epistle General of Peter (ib.).
3. Titles.
Vicar-Apostolic (Lat. Vicarius Apostolicus). 4 Poet Laur- 163.
eate (Lat. Poeta Laureatus). Notary-public (Lat. Notarius
publicus). - Professor Emeritus also has the form « Eme-
ritus Professor» (Bain, Rhet. and Comp.).
4. Possibly also such as these:
Toward the parties septemtrionales (Maundeville). 164.
1 But also, passim: Eternal life.
2 Meredith has in imitaiion of this: Thither Tailordom Trium-
phant was bearing its victim (E. Harrington).
3 But (ib.): Some incarnate Mefistopheles. — The one incarnate
hero of a life's imaginings (Cosmop. Mag., Oct. 1910).
4 But: Apostolic See, Apostolic Fathers, Apostolic Succession.
1
98
Toward the parte meridionalle (ib.). No man may see the
sterre transmontane (ib.).
G. Phrases borrowed from the French.
165. As is well known, the French language for a long
time reigned supreme in England, as far as certain depart-
ments were concerned. Above all, this was the case among
the clergy and accordingly in public education, in
court proceedings -- from which it did not quite disap-
pear until 1731 — and in parliament. Furthermore, every
branch of higher social life wore a French guise, and
there are even evidences of French having held a position
in the commercial world as well.1
166. The consequence of all this was that, when the for-
eign language was at length replaced by English, not
only separate words, but also a great many stationary ex-
pressions which had taken root deeply, remained, in the
same way as the inundating flood always leaves several
things behind, both good and evil. Some of these phras-
es later on took a partly anglicized form, whereas others
were kept unchanged.
167. Thus English up to this day exhibits a long file of
traditional phrases consisting of a noun with a postposi-
tive attribute, either so, that both.subst. and adj. are of
Romance extraction, or so, that only the adjective -- more
rarely the substantive only - originally belonged to the
French vocabulary. Many of the Anglo-Norman express-
ions in question have become extinct, but it appears from
the collection of examples that I have gathered how fre-
quent they were in Middle and Early Modern English.
As a matter of course, they are chiefly found within
1 Cf. VISING, Franska Spraket i England (Goteborg, 1900); BEHKENS,
Franz. Elemente im Engl.; Pauls Orundriss.
99
the provinces where French had most influence. They are,
then, to be met with in the language of heraldry, in eccle-
siastic language and learned language in general, in the
titles of the highest society, in the legal style, where chiv-
alrous life is referred to, etc.
1. Middle English phrases.
a. Legal style:
Allso })ai orden pat no bocher ... sle no booll but 168.
3"if he be baityd a-fore at a place consaet (Cov. L. B., 1423).
Myn executrice principall (E. E. Wills, 1433). They ordeyne
that . . . such maner upholders ... be pursewed as they
were persones sole (Cov. L. B., 1439). Your tables matri-
monial j)at wer made betwixt you and your husbandis
(Capgrave, Augustine; 1450). In eny Court spirituell (C. L.
B., 1457). He that hit wereth be servaunt menyal to us
(ib., 1461). Whoos names apperen in a letter testy moneall
(ib., 1472). Both in plee riall and personell (ib., 1464).
Our dute roiall (ib., 1472). Astate Roy all (ib.). A success-
oure legytyme (Blanch, and Egl., 1489). His resolucion fyn-
all was that . . . (ib.).
b. Ecclesiastic language:
Ase he dede to Even and to Adam in paradys ter- 169.
estre (Ayenb., 1340). God glorious, God victorious (Maundev.
Milliner). More pai lufe gudes temporall pen eternall (Fire
of Love, 1435). In paynes perpetuall pat pai have syn-
ned . . . (ib.). J>e psalme, transfourmed in-to pe persone
of man contemplatyve, sayes . . . (ib.). O pou light perpet-
ual, passynge all lightes create (Imit. Christi, 1440). Gadre
riches immortal (ib.). Be veraye permyssion devyne (Blanch,
and Egl.; 1489). Never . . . she sholde wedde paynem nor
noo man infydele l (ib.). There are also celestial bodies,
and bodies terrestrial (Auth. Vers., I. Cor., 15:40).
French text: Ung Infidele aovrant les y doles dyaboliques.
100
c. Learned style in general:
170. Mars rectograde, Mars direct. The excellence of the spere
(= sphere) solid (Chaucer, Astrolabe). L Cause accidental,
cause material, cause formal, cause final (Chaucer, Meli-
beus; Milliner). Sulphur vif (Maundev.; Mullner). A medi-
cyn defensif (Science of Cir., 1380). Medicyne mundificatif
(ib.). Medicyns mollificatyves (ib.). A piastre maturatijf (ib.).
Alle J)ese . . . ben but techinge of medicyns speculatijf (ib.).
A medicyn caustik (ib.). Heelynge by him-silf in fisik me-
dicinal (ib.). Veynis miserak ben smale veynes (ib.). Vey-
nes capillares (ib.). £e oon cause is clepid cause coniuncte;
and ]3e to})er cause antecedent (ib.). £e medicyne restric-
tive, forso])e (Fistula, 1400). A medicyne laxatyve (ib.). A
medicyne cauterizative (ib.). Vertue retentyve is feble, and
vertu expulsyve strong (ib.). A poudre J)at is called Pulver
greke (ib.). After pe pyttyng of J)e poudre greke (ib.).
d. Titles:
171. Sende hem to J)e mynystris provyncials (Wyclif, Rule
of St. Francis). A frere minour (Fistula). J»e frere mynours
of Yorke (ib.). I cured 4 frerez prechours (ib.). 5is Ru-
ben is referred on-to chanones secular (Capgrave, Sermon;
1422). tis may be applied in f>e best maner to chanones
regular (ib.). Whethur he be Notary impereall, or he be
not (Cov. L. B., 1423). Certeyn maydenes secular (Cap-
grave, St. Gilbert; 1451). My most dradde lorde and ffa-
dirs roiall ioureney into Scotland (C. L. B., 1481). His
lady soverayne (Blanch, and Egl., 148Q).
172. 2. The still remaining collocations are, however,
also numerous enough. To give a complete list of them
would neither be feasible nor of any particular interest.
For that reason I content myself with citing the most com-
1 STORM, Engl. Philologie. — These may also have been formed
on Latin models.
mon among them, and perhaps some more which have
happened to fall into my hands.
a. To the legal style belong:
Malice prepense (I felt sure she had played this card 173.
of malice prepense; Allen, Hilda Wade), and the half ang-
licized Malice aforethought. - - Fee-simple, and the like (Fee
is divided into two sorts: fee-absolute, otherwise called
fee-simple, and fee-conditional . . .; Cowell; Latham, Diet.).
Court Martial (Courts Martial; Macaulay, Hist.). Lords Ap-
pellant (Verity, Rich. II; Notes). Seal manual, Sign man-
ual (Therto I point my signet and my syne manuell; E.
E. Wills, 1428. That we undir our prive seal or signet
or signe manuell commande you to doo; C. L. B., 146Q.
The master's final sign-manual; Ruskin). Letter patent
(Letters patents; Rich. II, II: 1), Letters commendatory (There-
fore it ... is ... like perpetual letters commendatory to
have good forms; Bacon, Of Ceremonies), Letters dismissory
(The Bishop of London gave letters dismissory to the Bish-
op of Sodor and Man; H. Caine, Christian). Proof pos-
itive (And that she loves him I have proof positive; E.
Harrington), Proof demonstrative (cf. Oration demonstrative;
Wilson, Art of Rhet.; Latham, Diet.). Body politic1, Body
corporate (We . . . ordain that the said body politic and cor-
porate shall consist of . . .; Charter of Univ. of Lond.).
Heir female, Heir male (To him and to his heires males;
E. E. Wills, 1426. Sole heir male; Henry V, I: 2). Heir-ap-
parent (Esmond. -- POUTSMA: «Formerly also apparent heir»),
Heir-presumptive (POUTSMA: «Also occasionally presump-
tive heir»). Line male, Line female, Issue male (Gef the
same William dye withoute issue male; E. E. Wills, 1426.
For want of issue male; Naunton, Fragm. Reg.; 1630).
1 But BACON has, for reasons easily understood: As there are
mountebanks for the natural body, so are there mountebanks for the
politic body (Of Boldness).
102
Right divine l (Esmond. - POUTSMA: «It seems to be quite as
usual to place 'divine' before 'right' »). Blood royal (There
was no prince of the blood royal in the parliamentary
party; Macaulay. - From the outset «sank royal »: Saunke
realle; Morte Darthur. Sank royall; J. Skelton, 1522).
Signet royal (Producing his credentials under the signet
royal; Gulliver). Patent royal (Esmond).
b. To heraldry belong:
174. Lion couchant, Lion dormant, Lion seiant, Lion re-
g(u)ardant, Lion passant; 2 Luces haurient (Three pikes or
luces haurient). Bar sinister (My bar sinister may never be
surmounted by the coronet of Croye; Durward). Ensign
armorial (An escutcheon or ensign armorial, granted in mem-
ory of some distinguished feat; N. E. D., i. v. 'hatchment'). 3
c. Titles and terms of chivalrous life:
175. Prince f-ssj Royal4", Prince Imperial, Crown Imperial
(Verity, Henry V; Notes). Ambassador Extraordinary, En-
voy Extraordinary, Physician Extraordinary. County Pal-
atine. (Opium-eater), Count [-ess] Palatine, Elector-Palatine
(Esmond). Queen Dowager (Esmond: Viscountess Dowa-
ger), Queen Regnant; Queen Elect (Esmond; ib. also:
My Lady Duchess elect), Bride[-groom] elect (Esm.), Bishop
elect (The bishop elect takes the oaths of supremacy;
Ayliffe, Parergon Juris Canonici; Latham, Diet.). Lord
paramount 6 (He was also feudal lord paramount of the
whole soil of his kingdom; Macaulay. A great vassal
entering the presence of his Lord Paramount; Durward).
Governor General, Attorney General, Solicitor General, Vic-
ar General, Inspector General (Latham, Diet.). Minister
1 Cf. Right conferred.
2 These do not belong to § 111, as there is no verbality.
3 Cf. also, in heraldry: An eagle displayed.
4 KOCH mentions also: Astronomer royal, Chaplan royal.
5 Also: Traitor paramount.
103
Plenipotentiary. Premier Apparent. Bishop Designate, Vice-
roy Designate, Bishop Suffragan. Lords spiritual, Lords
temporal (POUTSMA: « Occasionally Spiritual Lords, Temp-
oral Lords »). Knight errant l, Knight Templar. Table
round (Arthur helde a Royal feeste and table rounde with his
alyes; Morte Darthur), Table dormant 2 («table with a
board attached to a frame, instead of lying loose upon
threstles»; Morris, Chaucer).
d. The following fall within different provinces:
Gumme arable (Fistula). Sal volatile (Nickleby). Ac- 176.
count-current (Crusoe). Sum total (The sternest sum-total
of all worldly misfortunes is Death; Carlyle, Ess. on Burns),
Net-total (Carlyle, Ess. on Scott). Point-device, Point-blank
(As it were point-blancke before them; Florio). Sister Ger-
man 3, Brother German 3 (J)is childe stale ane halpeny from
his bruper-german; Alph. of Tales, 15:thcent.), Cousin ger-
man3 (They were cosyn germyns; Three Kings' Sons, 1500.
This . . . seemeth in my opinion cosen-german to this; Florio.
They knew it was their cousin german; Ph. Sidney). A knave
complete (Wenstr.-Lindgr.). From times remote (Kriiger), From
time immemorial 4 (From time immemorial a fundamental
law of England; Macaulay). Quantity neglectable (KRUGER:
«0blicher a negligible quantity '»).
Younger: Goblet in old silver repousse (Studio, June, 1910).
H. Proper (Improper).
'Proper' deserves to be treated apart. 'Proper' is, '177.
says KRUGER, always placed behind in the sense of »eigent-
1 Also Bailiff errant, Justice errant (Our judges of assize are
called justices errant. Called a bailiff errant; Butler; Latham, Diet.).
2 But, Naunton, Fragm. Reg.: She held a dormant Table in her
own Princely breast.
3 Possibly originating in the legal language.
4 Cf. Depuis un temps immemorial (Balzac, Femme de 30 Ans).
104
lich». This is not quite correct, inasmuch as we say in a
proper sense, the proper type, proper (improper) fraction.
The matter is better formulated by POUTSMA: » Proper [is
placed after the noun] in the sense of 'exclusive of ac-
cessories'» (e. g. Food proper, Egypt proper, the Dictionary
proper).
178. The origin of the inverted word-order is certainly to
be looked for in the Anglo-Norman legal language.
The first combinations with 'proper' probably were such
as London proper, The City proper, Seamen proper. At first,
then, it might have been a question of set phrases only,
similar to those above dealt with. But on account of the
emphasis of the adjective, and possibly also as a means
of avoiding misinterpretation, since 'proper' had other mean-
ings too, 1 it became by and by the rule always to use
postposition when 'proper' meant «exclusive of accessories».
Nowadays one does not any more say: Proper Arabia is
divided into five provinces (Sale, Koran; 1734; N. E. D.);
but one does not either say: Noun proper (N. E. D., 1551),
where 'proper' has another meaning ('peculiar'). — 'Improp-
er' agrees with 'proper'.
Examples: It contains the Fin proper of Finland, the
Estonian etc. (Latham, Diet.). The seamen proper form but
a portion of the crew of a ship (Escott, England, its Peo-
ple, Polity, and Pursuits). Thus 'will' has to do duty both
as 'will' proper and also as lwilf improper (Abbott, Sh.
Gram.). The author's views on phonetics proper are ex-
" pressed in the vaguest and most abstract way (Sweet).
Novels proper and novels improper (Sweet).
More freely used: The dingiest of windows which . . .
1 Cf. With his own propre swerd he was slayn (Maundev.; N.
E. D.). For to sytte in dome in proper parsoun (Hampole; N. E. D.).
Of the King of England's own proper cost (II, Henry VI, I: 1).
105
were made the dingier by their own iron bars proper, and
the heavy shadow of Temple Bar (Two Cities).
For the sake of variety or euphony the longer «prop- 179.
erly so called» is sometimes used:
In so splendid ... a manner did the English people, prop-
erly so called, l first take place among the nations of the world
<Macaulay, Hist). It was not till 1 740 that the first English
novel, properly so called, Richardson's Pamela, made its
appearance (Robertson, Hist, of Engl. Lit.).
In heraldry 'proper' means «in the natural colouring* . 180.
Of course it is here" also put after the noun: Ivy proper
(N. E. D., i. v. 'proper').
I. Pseudo-Anglo-French terms.
After the pattern of the above-mentioned fixed phras- 181.
es a great many collocations resembling these have been
coined by different authors, some of which have come to
be more commonly used. Several of the expressions in
question might be styled pseudo-Anglo-French terms, be-
ing direct imitations of real Anglo-French terms and con-
taining either the same substantive or the same adjective.
Examples: The crowns and garlands personal (Bacon,
Of Health). Malice domestic (Macbeth, III: 2). And that
not only as a town corporate (Bunyan, H. War). Besides,
our times have seen enough to make men loathe the Crown
Matrimonial (Kenilworth). A free coronet of England is
worth a crown matrimonial held at the humour of a wom-
an (ib.). Damosels-errant (Durward). 2 (Cf. also: The trade of a
damsel adventurous; ib.). Benevolence prepense (Carlyle, Ess.
on Scott). The master-organ and true pineal gland of the
Body Social (Sartor). The tax for the lord, tax local and
1 Cf. Fr. La grammaire proprement dite.
2 Also: Damsel-err anting (Durward).
106
tax general (Two Cities). Tribune-Elect (Rienzi). Such is
man, though a Deucalion elect; such is woman though a
Pyrrha (Opium-eater). Fool Errant (Hewlett, Book title). —Com-
pare also: This is the Father Superior, sir (Christian).1
182. Particularly such with 'royal' are very common:
Rime roial (Seven-lined stanzas used first by James I, 1424).
Draws the eyes of the people somewhat aside from the
line royal (Bacon, Of Nobility). The tent royal of their em-
peror (Henry V, I: 2). It is against the law, government,
and the prerogative royal of our king (Holy War). A com-
edy as performed at the Theatres-Royal in Drury Lane
and Covent Garden (Sheridan, Rivals). 2 The clump of
large oaks, which they call the Clump Royal (New Forest).
J. Humorous phrases.
183. A rather extensive group of imitative expressions with
a postpositive adjective is formed by such as seem to have
been coined by the several authors in a moment of good
humour and tend to give a comical colouring to what is
being said. Such formations are naturally of an ephemeric
character, as a rule, but some there are nevertheless that
prove to have been more tenacious of life. Similar hu-
morous phrases have been common ever since Shake-
spear's days. Some of them are exclusively satirical.
Examples: Sport Royal, I warrant you (Tw. Night,
II: 3). And yet he will not stick to say his face is a face
royal (II, Henry IV, I: 2). Thou buckram lord, now art
thou within point-blank of our jurisdiction regal (II, Henry
VI, IV: 7). Bully Sir John! Speak from thy lungs military:
art thou there (Merry Wives, IV: 5). He is a motion gener-
ative, that's infallible (Measure, III: 2). Scene individable,
1 This might also be an imitation of a Latin expression.
- Theatre Royal occurs, however, not only in Sheridan.
107
or poem unlimited (Hamlet, 11:2. But cf. §110). From the
inwards to the parts extreme (II, Henry IV, IV: 3). Have
you been a sectary astronomical (Lear, I: 2). That sprightly
Scot of Scots, Douglas, that runs o' horseback up a hill
perpendicular (I, Henry IV, II: 4). This we call the oath
referential, or sentimental swearing (Rivals). Puffing is of
various sorts: the puff direct, the puff preliminary, the puff
collateral, the puff collusive, and the puff oblique (Sheri-
dan, The Critic). Mr. Dangle [reading newspapers] : » Theat-
rical intelligence extraordinary »(ib.). Whilst the battle roy-
al was going on between me and Tom Caffin (Duval).
He stood on the other side of the gulf impassable l (Van.
Fair). Until November should come with its fogs atmos-
pheric and fogs legal and bring grist to the mill again
(Two Cities). The life-matrimonial (Nickleby). He had
allied . . . himself . . . with a Farmer-General (Two Cities).
As to finances public, because . . .; as to finances private,
because . . . (ib.). The postillion would rather have had
to do with the gentleman royal, who is above base com-
putation (Ev. Harrington). Superior by grace divine (ib.).
Eyebrows as black and as straight as the borders of a
Gazette Extraordinary, when a big man dies (Plain Tales).
That wonder, the human heart female (Meredith, S. Belloni).
Failing to find the growth spontaneous she returned (E.
Harrington). The burial alive of woman intellectual (S. Bel-
loni). The we matrimonial must be as universal as the we
editorial (Hope, Quistante). Proceeding from jokes linguistic
to jokes practical (R. Haggard, Jess.). That was his title
ecclesiastical (Cardinal's Snuff-box). Peter was sufficiently
versed in fashions canonical (ib.). Sent to a place unmen-
tionable ten times in an hour (Two Years Ago. But cf.
§ 110). He rose as high as he conveniently could in the Navy
1 Cf., however, § 110. This expression is, besides, imitated by
KINGSLEY: That . . . looked to Nhim a gulf Impassable (Two Years Ago).
108
active, and turned his attention to the Navy passive 1 (Mer-
riman, In a Crooked Way). The powers that are in the
world journalistic (Punch, Aug. 19, 1893). Mrs. Melville . . .
gave her the glance intelligible (E. Harrington. Cf. next §).
184. It is chiefly those with 'lie' and 'retort' that seem to
have been more durable; they appear indeed to have grown
into what may be called slang expressions. (Always def. art.).
Examples: The first, the Retort Courteous; the sec-
ond, the Quip Modest; the third, the Reply Churlish;
the seventh, the Lie Direct (As you, V: 4). Give the lie
direct (Merc, of Yen.; Q. Durward). He cannot, however,
give the lie direct to Guildenstern (Verity, Hamlet; Notes).
Thus in As you like it ... «the lie circumstantial is «the
lie indirect» (ib.). Twill be but the retort courteous on
both sides (Sheridan, Scarborough). That is the retort dis-
courteous (Molly Bacon). Dropping for the first and
last time . . . into the retort direct (P. Kelver). The Retort
Sarcastic. She: Hullo, John . . . (Winds. Mag., April, 1910).
The Countess, an adept in the lie implied, deeply smiled
(E. Harrington). To turn it from the lie extensive and in-
appreciable to the lie minute and absolute (S. Belloni).
K. Postposition of Romance adjectives in general.
185. During the Middle English and the Early Modern
English periods people did not restrict themselves to using
postposition of Romance adjectives in set phrases and imi-
tations of such. On the contrary, all those being so fre-
quent, it was indeed thought necessary or at least admiss-
ible to use inverted word-order in other cases as well,
wherever a French adjective was concerned even if
1 These are perhaps rather imitations of the grammar style: Par-
ticiple passive etc. (§ 155).
109
nothing was attained but a more « dignified* tone. 1 And
down to our days occasional echoes of this, strictly speak-
ing, licentious practice are to be found.
Examples: 5e oper is to wyfmanne commune, pe Jjridde
is of man sengle mid wodewe (Ayenb. Legal style?). £o bye})
ypocrites sotyls f>et . . . (ib.). !>ri manere worries venimoa-
ses (ib.). £ise bye|) J3e ])ri boges principals (ib.). He lye-
se|) pane time pecious (ib.). Ee folk of pe mercerye of
London . . . compleyen ... of many wronges subfiles and
also open oppressions (Note the different ways of treating
the foreign adj. and the native one! Petition from the
folk of Mercerye» of London, 1386; Kluge). Now wol I pray
mekely every person discrete, that . . . (Chaucer, Astrolabe;
13Q1). The morwe is a day uncertayn (Imit. Christi, 1440).
To lyve in remembraunce perpetuel (Godfrey of Bol., 1481.
Prologue. The prologue is written by Caxton himself!).
By his blessyd presence humayne (ib., Prol.). To thende
that ther may be gyven to them name Inmortal (ib.. Prol.).
For tempryse and accomplysshe enterpryses honnestes (ib.,
Prol.). In which wordes generall «and other thynges» ys
understanden thornes, firres etc. (Cov. L. B., 1480). Her
lover and frende specyall (Blanch, and Egl., 148Q). There
nys no ton ge humayn that coude . . . (ib.). Her right sieve,
whiche was of riche clothe of golde crymosyn (ib.; cf.
«riche clothe»!) A sieve that was of satyn vyolet (ib.). An-
dreas Goveanus, our Rector principall (Florio). To enter
their City as a place confederate 2 (ib.). Finally me thynk-
eth that the constitucion provincial . . . hath determyned
this question (Legal style? Th. More, Concerning Heresy).
1 In some M. E. translations, e. g. the Fire of Love, the Mend-
ign of Life, the Ayenbite of Inwit, postpositive attributes are nearly
as frequent as prepositive. This does not even touch Romance adj.
only.
2 Cf., however, § 114.
110
The confederate had leagues defensive with divers other
states (Bacon). His chamber ... is a kind of Charnel-
house of bones extraordinary (Earle, Micro-cosm.; 1628). If
hee be qualified in gaming extraordinary (ib.). His fac-
ulties extraordinary (ib.). He was a great master of the
Art Military l (Naurrton, Fragm. Reg.; 1630). Behold a man
gluttonous, 2 and a wine-bibber (Matth., XI: 1Q). Duty im-
plicit is her cry (Clarissa). By art-magic she has spell-
bound thee (Sartor). Gorgon, and Hydras, and Chimceras
dire (Lamb, Elia). His coat dark rappee, tinctured by dye
original (ib.). Goddesses have youth perpetual (Esmond).
In a little dust quiescent (ib.). 3 We have gone so far as to
combine the ideas of an agility astounding, a strength
superhuman, a ferocity brutal, a butchery without motive
(Po'e, Murders in the Rue Morgue). Rest is force resistant,
and motion is force triumphant* (Lewes, Hist, of Phil.;
Poutsma). No doubt to the wise it seems a fool's life,
to the holy a life impure (Ouida, Pipistrello). The Dish
Delicious that gratifies every taste (Royal Mag., July 1Q10;
cf. § 184). Tree-training extraordinary (ib.).
«Ears polite» has become a standing expression:
The improper application of the wrong term at the wrong
time makes all the difference in the world to ears polite (Cole-
ridge, Society Small Talk). To say that she is inclined to
embonpoint, will, however, sound less shocking to ears
polite (Mrs. Hungerford, Phyllis). A horror to ears polite
(Jespersen, Growth).
In the following quotation there seems to be anal-
ogy with 'deceased', and also influence from the short
1 Thus also Lamb, in a humorous way: Studying the art military
over that laudable game «French and English* (Elia).
2 But Luke, VII: 34: A gluttonous man.
3 There is no verbality in the adj., so they do not belong to
Ch. VII. But of course there might be analogy.
Ill
annotation style: Some half-forgotten humours of some
old clerks defunct (Lamb, Elia; cf. § 79).
The word-order in the following, again, is apparently 187.
due to contamination with such modes of expression as
<with [his] head erect»: If necks unelastic and heads erect
may be taken as the sign of a proud soul . . ., my artist
has the major for his model (Harrington).
I think we have to deal with an apposition in: 188.
But then Philip drunk with jealousy is not a reasonable
being like Philip sober (cf . « Philip senior*. Thackaray, Philip).
The adjectives are most likely predicative in the 189.
following:
We are in a state of sad confusion — officers quar-
elling, men disobedient, much talking and little doing (New
Forest). This may also be the case in: Colour ungra-
dated is wholly valueless; colour unmysterious is wholly
barbarous (=to have the c. unmysterious? Two Paths).1
L. Postposition with 'thing, 'matter".
FR. KOCH (Hist. Gram. //, § 241) assumes French in- 190.
fluence for « All things secular •», « Things spiritual*, « Matters
ecclesiastic* , etc. -- ABBOTT says (Sh. Gram., § 419): «The
adjective is placed after the noun (1) in legal expressions ... (2)
where a relative clause, or some conjunctional clause, is
understood between the noun and adjective. Hence, where
the noun is unemphatic as 'thing', 'creature', this transpo-
sition may be expected*. POUTSMA remarks (Gram, of
Late Mod. Engl. I, p. 333): «Even adjectives standing by
themselves and not accompanied by any modifier, when
placed after the noun they modify, are sometimes felt as
1 Compare: What profitip a body dene and a hert defouled (= to
keep one's body clean. Capgrave, St. Gilbert; 1451). We should simply
combine a noun which implies a glottis wide open with an adjective
which implies a glottis nearly shut (Lloyd, North. Engl.).
112
undeveloped clauses. This is especially the case with
many when qualifying the nouns 'matters' or 'things', or
the indefinite pronoun 'one'».
191. The talk about an undeveloped clause is totally
valueless, for any adjective attribute can be resolved into
a relative clause. Besides, as I have tried to make plain,
the adjective attribute derives its origin from the predi-
cative use of the adjective. Compare, moreover, § 26.
192. As for assuming French influence in expressions con-
sisting of 'thing(s)' or 'matter(s)' -{- adj., this theory seems
plausible only as far as 'matters' is concerned. 'Matters' is
nearly always followed by an adjective of Romance ex-
traction, mostly one in -al or -tic. But 'things' -)- adj.
does not occur in set phrases only, there is rather a tend-
ency almost always to place the attribute after this word
in an abstract sense, and postposition is even often met
with when 'things' has a concrete meaning. And, indeed,
why should French influence* be more likely in the case
of 'things' than in the case of any other noun, whenever
a French equivalent of the expression might be fancied?
193. With regard to instances like the following, where
there is a sing, 'thing' without any article, one would feel
much tempted to subscribe to the above theory:
£e proude zekf) ping worfissipvol, J)e covaytous ping
vremvol (Ayenb.). Vor ping gostlich (ib.). Of pinge ypas-
ed (ib.). l
But in the first place the Ayenbite follows its French
original, in other cases too, so slavishly that no heed need
be taken to this 2; secondly, omission of the indefinite
article is rather common even in older Middle English;
cf. for instance:
1 Cf. Le manage a paru chose si excellente (Balzac, Femme de
30 Ans).
2 Cf. MULLNER p. 53.
113
f»u bethlem eordu undaerfe ding lyttel ar6 (North.
Transl. of Matth.). It is more blissid condicioun for to ^yve
betere ping f>an to take ping lesse worfi (Wycliff, De Off.
Pastoral!).
I will try to give an explanation that is exclusively 194.
based on the inherent possibilities of the language. Still,
let me premise the admission that the fact that there is
no obstacle to using inversion in several other cases, mostly
owing to the influence of French really, and in particular
the phrases with 'matters' - though they are not numer-
ous may have been one of the reasons for the pro-
pagating of the now very common word-order 'things'
+ adj.
First, however, an illustration of postposition in con- 195.
nection with 'matters':
Maters dyvers for the wele of this cite (Cov. L. B.,
1451). With penal statutes in matters ecclesiastical (Ma-
caulay, Hist.). Nay, even in matters spiritual is it not well
that there should be what we call professions preap-
pointed to us (Sartor). France, less favoured on the whole
as to matters spiritual 'than her sister (Two Cities). The
recent interference of Parliament in matters ecclesiastical
had fluttered the dove-cotes of the Church (Oliphant,
Victorian Age). [He] was lenient in matters scholastic
(Boothby, Woman of Death). [He] had suddenly lost all
interest in matters aquatic (ib.). Concerning the admini-
stration of matters parochial (Merriman, On the Rocks).
His Majesty is still a good way behind the times in mat-
ters artistic (Westm. Gaz., Aug. 5, 1Q02).
All these combinations make decidedly the impress-
ion of set phrases, the oldest of them no doubt orig-
inally belonging to juridical phraseology.
The following is of course only an imitation in which 'matters'
stands for the more common 'things': No one... could hold a candle
8
114
to Cartoner in matters Spanish (Merriman, Tale of a Scorpion). -
Thus also 'matter' instead of 'thing' in: This is a thing may seem
to many a matter trivial (Bacon, Unity in Religion).
In the following quotation 'matter' is concrete, meaning 'stuff
(cf. Fr. matiere). The postposition is probably due to the quality of
the attribute: To greet aboundaunce of mater corrumpinge (part.!
Science of Cir., 1380).
196. What has been said about 'matters' also applies to
'causes': His Majesties Commissioners for causes Ecclesi-
astical in the high Commission Court (A decree of the
Star-Chamber, Concerning Printing; 1637).
197. I now proceed to 'things' + adj. - In a sentence
like / have seen something horrible 'horrible' is at bottom
a partitive genitive. Cf. Lat. aliquid pulchri, Fr. quelque
chose de beau, Germ, etwas Schones, Goth, hva ubilis (Mark.,
15: 14), A. S. hwcetvugu ryhtices (Cura Past.).
In course of time, however, such an attribute has,
just as in German, come to be taken for an ordinary in-
dependent adjective in the same grammatical relation as
the substantive word. Naturally this was not possible in
English until the adjective flexion had disappeared. l There-
fore in Anglo-Saxon on the one hand: Mid Qaere gewil-
nunge bara ungesewenlicra ftinga (Cura Past.), on the other:
Sum ping niwes, Nan ping grenes, Ainig ping godes (Matz-
ner, p. 284).
198. As then the connection between 'some' ('any', 'no',
'every') and 'thing' was not so close in olden times as it
is now - as is shown by the two words being written
separately a phrase consisting of 'some' etc. -f 'thing'
-f- adj. got every outward appearance of being a case of
postposition of an adjective attribute.
Compare: Her-of come}) it f>at in every ping general . . .
f>er mot ben some ping {)at is perfit (Chaucer, Boethius).
No thinge wretyn (R. Hampolle). The hearing of any thing
1 In German the reason is another.
115
good (II, Henry IV, I: 2). If afterwards I should see any
thing objectionable in his conduct (Clarissa). Without any
thing remarkable (Andrews). Every thing great or excellent
(Rambler). - - Even as late as Irving: A home destitute of
every thing elegant (Sketchbook).
There is something very similar in the case of 'all' + 199-
'things' + adj., where «all things» is identical with the pro-
noun 'everything'; the former may be said to stand in the
same relation to 'all' as the latter does to 'every'.
Examples: Ther was all things necessary (== »every-
thing necessary »; Euphues, 157Q). Sir, I thank you for
all things courteous and civil (Bunyan, H. War). Leaving
out verbs and particles, because in reality all things imag-
inable are but nouns (Gulliver). In those last days all
things false and meaningless they laid aside (P. Kelver). The
great brick monster had crept closer round about us year
by year, devouring in his progress all things fair (ib.).
His enthusiasm for all things microscopical (ib). Virtue
could not change her appearance even if all things base
chose to assume the appearance of Virtue (Verity, Macb.;
Notes).
In like manner «a thing» in the following quotations 200.
is to be looked upon as simply an impersonal pronoun
very much the same as 'something' \ in the place of which
it stands in order that ambiguity may be avoided, since
'something' was in older English used also in the sense
of modern 'somewhat'.
Examples: Herein I do not profess myself a Stoic, to
hold grief no evil, but . . . a thing indifferent (Bacon, Of
Death). It must absolutely be received as a thing grave
and sober (Bacon, Pref. to Wisdom of the Ancients). It
1 Cf. Of a thing known, something new, unknown, is predicated.
This something known . . . naturally comes first (Me Knight, Prim.
Teut. Order of Words).
116
is a thing rare and hard to keep (Bacon, Of Empire). Why
should it be thought a thing incredible with you that God
should raise the dead (Acts, 26: 8). To which I return that,
as it was a thing slight and obvious to think on ... (Mil-
ton, Areopagitica). I looked now upon the world as a thing
remote (Crusoe). It is a thing perilous in war and must be
amended (Durward). It is a thing remarkable, a thing sub-
stantial (Carlyle, Ess. on Scott). He affects to regard it as
a thing natural (Sartor).
201. In Late Modern English there are few instances of
«a thing» being followed by an adjective, probably because
'something' has not now the meaning of «a little», «abit».
I have found these: A drum in these hills was a
thing unknown (Cf., however, 'unknown', § 104. Poe, Rag-
ged Mountains). Those who conceive the Ego in man
as a thing simple, permanent, reliable, and of one essence
(Cf. § 121! D. Gray). Of a thing known something new,
unknown, is predicated (No doubt in order to avoid two
something's. Me Knight, Prim. Teut. Order of Words).
To her excited fancy Macbeth's attainment of the crown
seems almost a thing accomplished (This is a participle!
Perhaps the author has also had in mind Fr. «un fait ac-
compli». Verity).
The inverted word-order in the following quotations is due to
other reasons which apply to any unemphatic noun: To prove that
it was a tiling very convenient, apd fitting a man of his quality (Florio;
§ 128). A thing most singular (ib.; § 126). To which Jenny . . .
replied that it was a thing quite impossible (E. Harrington; § 125).
In instances like the following the participle is verbal: 'Addita-
menf, addition, or thing added (Latham, Diet.). 'Dictatum', a thing
dictated (Verity, As You; Glossary).
202. On the other hand, it is very common even in Present
English to find an adj. attr. placed after an abstract
unemphatic plur. 'things'. Also in this case 'things'
may be said to be a kind of indefinite pronoun, one
117
might indeed often be justified in saying that it has sunk
to be simply an article, just as the original dem. pron. has
become an article. «Things divine* is precisely the same
as «The divine» («Det gudomliga», «Das G6ttliche»). Where
participles are concerned other circumstances may, of
course, have played a role, but not, generally, when the
attribute is an ordinary adjective. Emphasis alone is no
sufficient reason, as that would make us expect the same
word-order with other unemphatic substantives as well.
Examples with participles: The nature of thinges ne
token nat her bigynnyng of thinges amenused and imperfit
(Chaucer, Boethius). And answere he sleig-ly to pingis y-
asked1 (Fistula, 1400). It is grevous to leve fringes acust-
iimmed (Imit. Christi, 1440). Sithen thynges passed cannot
be gaine called (Th. More, Rich. Ill; 1513). Although their
lips sound of things done1, and verity be written in their
foreheads (Sidney, Apologie; 15Q5). Old men are dangerous
who have onely the memorie of things past left them (Florio).
Knowledge of things forbidden (Bacon, Pref. to Wisdom of
the Ancients). The law makes a difference between things
stolen and things found 2 (Andrews). I come ... to speak of
things forgotten or things disputed (Ruskin, Pre-raph.).
Examples with adjectives: Studie J)erfore to wi]>
drawe J>in herte fro |>e love of fringes visible, and translate
hem to fringes invisible (Imit. Christi, 1440). So })ei put to
pingis coeterne, and called J)ei good (Capgrave, Augustine;
1450). The reporte of them contayneth thinges impossible
and is not written by any approved author (Th. Elyot,
Governour). Things unknown are the true scope of im-
posture (Florio). If thou be capable of things serious, thou
must know the king is full of grief (Winter's Tale, IV: 4).
1 Here the part, may, of course, be quite verbal.
2 I do not take 'things' to be concrete here.
118
What else is all that rank of things indifferent, wherein
Truth may be on this side or on the other (Milton, Areop.).
I will talk of things Heavenly, or things Earthly ; things more
essential, or things circumstantial (Pilgr. Progr.). His mind
was on things divine (ib.). Many felt a strong repugnance
even to things indifferent which had formed part of the
polity (Macaulay, Hist.). I do not mean the assertion to
extend to things moral (Ruskin, Pre-raphael.). In the world
of things enjoyable (Opium-eater). He would soon grow
reconciled to things monstrous (E. Harrington). In the im-
putation of things evil, and in the putting the worst con-
struction on things innocent (Plain Tales). Joy in things
physical (Cardinal's Snuff-box). Things good and things bad
may be concealed (King's Mirror).
203. The following examples belong, strictly speaking, to a
previous chapter (Ch. X), but may be cited here.
To wyfjdrawe us bi f>e same comaundement fro
pynges nedeful and lefful (Petition from «the folk of Mer-
cerye» of- London, 1386; Kluge). All commerce between things
divine and human (Bacon, Pref. to Wisdom of the Ancients).
Things necessary and certain often surprise us (Idler). I
had dreamed so many foolish gracious things; things heroical,
fantastical, woven from the legends of saints (Ouida, Pi-
pistrello). Not open wide to embrace the universe of things
beautiful and ugly (King's Mirror). Hecate is essentially the
goddess of things supernatural and magical (Verity, Ham-
let; Notes). — None of the beautiful things of the world
were to be seen here, but only the things coarse and ugly
(P. Kelver).
204. The following belong more appropriately to Ch. XI:
At least things more absurd have surely happened (King's
Mirror). To be compared to Ganymede in private by a
lady and in public by a scoffer are things very different
(God in the Car).
119
Even a concrete 'things' is sometimes followed by 205.
its attribute, by analogy, I suppose. Of this I have not
found any instance in modern English, excepting such cases
where the word-order depends on other circumstances.
In the following quotations 'things' is pronominal:
Aye (against) {rise heste seneg-e}) {30, f>et to moche
loviej) hire guod, gold o{>er zelver, oj)er opre fringes erpliche
(Swed. «annat jordiskt». Ayenb.). They shold lede vytaylle
ynowe unto the hooste and other thynges necessary e 1
(Godfr. of Bol., 1481). Perished for want of food and
other things necessary 1 (Bacon, New Atlantis). Wherein . . .
I have had glimpses of buried treasure and other things
submerged (Part.! Two Cities). [« Other things » is in the
same relation to 'other' as is 'something' to 'some'.]
With many mo thynges profitable whiche are commonly
knowen by every man (W. Bulleyn, Booke of Compounds;
1562. E. E. Meals and Manners). Many things necessary l
are omitted (Rambler).
In the following two ex. a concrete sing, 'thing7 is followed
by its attribute, but it should be noticed that the attributes are, in
the first instance an adj. in -able (cf. § 109), in the other instance a
participle: Wif> smytynge of staf or stoon ... or wi[> ony opir ping
semblable (Science of Cir., 1380). He passes on with no recognition, or,
being stopped, starts like a thing surprised (Elia; cf. § 34).
The following also contain special kinds of attributive words:
Now bless thyself: Thou mettest with things dying, I with things new-
born (Winter's Tale, III: 3). We write unto them that they abstain
from pollution of idols and from fornication, and from things
strangled, and from blood (Acts, 15: 20). The regulating of prices of
things vendible (Bacon, Seditions).
Other motives may lie at the bottom of these instances: 2 206.
Which bringeth forth out of his treasure things new and
old (Matth., 13: 52). It was a breath . . . hinting of things
exquisite, intimate — of things intimately feminine, exquis-
1 Cf., however, § 116.
- Cf. Chapters X and XI.
120
itely personal (Harland, Cardinal's Snuff-box). The in-
gredients of the Witches' caldron naturally consist of things
venomous or loathsome (Verity, Macb.; Notes). A world
which is so corrupt that the very sun produces things foul and
offensive (Verity, Hamlet; Notes).
The following is unique: The thing Visible, nay the thing Imag-
ined, what is it but a garment (Sartor). Usually: «Things visible*,
or: «The visible*.
M. Postposition of native adjectives not preceded
by any adverb in Old and Middle English.
207. In Anglo-Saxon and Middle English it is nowise
uncommon for a single attributive native adjective
not preceded by any adverb to stand after the noun.
In the first place word-order was then in all respects freer
than it is in Modern English. The older idiom naturally
stands on a lower stage of development and is more like
the parent language. Also in the oldest German and Scan-
dinavian, and in Gothic, postpositive adj. attr. are met with:
Moysise dodemu (Lat. text: defuncto Moyse!), Fater einemu
(Isidor; Hell wig); Rikr hofdingi ok malafylgjumaftr mikill^
(Hellwig, p. 20); Bi hveila niundon (In disagreement with
the Greek order! Me KNIGHT).
208. Moreover, much of what is classed among A. S. and
M. E. prose is in reality nothing but disguised poetry; and
it is a well-known fact that poetry is prior to prose. A
great many of the Anglo-Saxon and mediaeval sermons,
religious tracts, and legends of saints - - and they formed
the bulk of the prose literature of those times - were
written in a kind of rhythmic prose which may perhaps
1 Me KNIGHT, Prim. Tent Order of Words, of Old Norse: «In
.case of two nouns, each with an adj., the order is, adj., noun, noun,
adj.». — Similarly HELLWIG, p. 20.
121
sometimes have been imitated by authors of chronicles and
other secular works.
Under these circumstances it is not so very difficult
to account for the fact that inverted word-order is met
with to such an extent as proves to be the case. As regards
M. E., French models may, of course, often have had
something to do with the matter. But I do not attach
much importance to this, for would postposition have been
possible, if there had not been any basis for it in the
language itself?
In the following instances the adjectives seem most 209.
probably to be used appositionally:
£is is min sunu se leofa (Rushw. Gloss.). Cyle pone
grimmestan (Blickl. Horn.; Milliner). Sethes eafora se yldeste
waes Enos haten (Caedmon; Matzner). Bisenctum swe swe
lead in wetre deem strengestan (Merc. Hymns; A. S. Reader).
Aet ea pcere halgan (Sax. Chron.). Smeche forcudest (Sawles
Warde). While fortune unfaithfnll favoured me with light
godes (Chaucer, Boethius). f>is odyr solitary in contemplacion
hiest onely givyn to godly Hingis (Mending of Life, 1434). 1
In cases like the following the word-order is best explained by
the added complements: Cethegrande is a fis 6e moste bat in "water
is (Rel. Ant.; Matzner, p. 287). It is a lake the grettest of the world
(Maundev.; ib).
Examples in which the attribute is not appositional: 210.
f>a gemette he gebeoras blfoe 2 aet ])am huse (Aelfric, Os-
wald; A. S. Reader). Her synd on earde apostatan abroftene
and cyrichatan hetole, and leodhatan grimme (Wulfstan,
Address to the Engl.; ib.). Tobrocene sind muntas swidlice,
and tofleowun hyllas ecelice (Merc. Hymns; ib.). And J)aer sint
swide micle meras fersce geond J>a moras (Voy. of Othere;
1 Imitations of these in Modern Engl.: From peace the deepest
(Opium-eater). Under the mere coercion of pain the severest (ib.).
2 MULLNER (p. 30) declares the adj. to be predicative here, which
I do not think to be the case.
122
ib.). Condel beorht (Sax. Chron.; Kube). Eorlas arhwate (ib.).
Cild unweaxen (ib.). Her Jirote ys agraueopen (E. E. Psalter).
Felagrede flesslich (Ayenb.). £et' is zenne dyadlich (ib.).
Vor some skele kueade (ib.). Oure vaderes gostliche (ib.). l
Wordes ydele (ib.). Manye of>re kueade roten 2 (ib.). Of ane
zuetnesse wondervol (ib.). Hare eawles gledreade (Sawles
Warde). 5e mlddelwei guldene (ib.). J>is writ open (Procl.
of Henry III, 1258). These thinges . . . moche bringen us
to the ful knowleginge sothe 2 (Chaucer, Test, of Love).
To make festis huge to lordis and ladies (Wycliff, Leaven
of Phar.). Aboute temperal almes nedles (ib.). Recipe:
malvez tame M. I or II (Fistula). WiJ) oile or butter fressh,
or suche o{)er (ib.). Erede of silk white (ib.). A pare of glovys
of plate blacke (E. E. Wills, 1411). Glovis of plate white
(ib.). I hafe bene broght up in f>is abbay of bam littil
(Alph. of Tales). A yong preste }>at sho had broght up
of barn little hur self (ib.). Large shetes goode (E. E. Wills,
1434). Be eny suche ordenaunce unlafull (Cov. L. B., 1476).
As a man madde (Blanch, and Egl.'; cf. also § 34). That was
of damask blake (ib.). Two holies hore (Arthur).
211. When a poss. pron. follows the noun in Anglo-Saxon
the adjective does so too.
Examples: J>is is sunu mm leof in 9aem me woel
gelicade (North. Transl. of Matth.). Sehde in sibbe bitternis
min sie bittreste (Merc. Hymns, A. S. Reader). To donne
mildheortnisse mid fedrum urum, ond gemunan cydnisse his
haligre (ib.). Eaet he ... ofdrysce pa lustas his unfteawa
(Cura Past.). — Thus also with a dem. pron.: Se J>e toslittes
enne of bebodum pissum loesestum (North. Matth.).
212. Words denoting the points of the compass and
1 According to MATZNER, Engl. Sprachproben, I, II, p. 62, it is
particularly adj. in -lich that are placed behind in the Ayenbite.
2 Co-ordination of two attributes before a noun is rare in the
oldest language. This is one way of avoiding it.
123
others in -weard seem always to have had their given place
after the noun in Anglo-Saxon. It looks as though they
were even at that early date, in spite of their adjectival
flexion, felt as adverbs, rather than real adjectives. In case
they were put before the subst. the word-order was this:
J>reo stodon aet ufeweardum poem muftan on drygum (Sax.
Chron., 8Q7). On midde-weardutn hyre ryne (Pop. Treat.,
Wright; Matzner, p. 568).
Otherwise: /Et paem muftan uteweardum (Saxon Chron.,
897). IV mila fram J)aem muftan uteweardum (ib., 893).
£onne is toemnes fjaem lande sufteweardum, Sweoland, oj>
J^aet land norfteweard; and toemnes poem lande norfteweardum,
Cwena land (Voyages of Othere; A. S. Reader). /O pam
lea ufeweardan (A. S. Charters, Eadmund; A. S. R.). On
pa lytlan dune middewearde (ib.). On foxhylle easteweardre
(ib.). f>a eagan bioj) on f>am lichoman foreweardum and
ufeweardum (Cura Past.). On pysse dune ufanweardre (Bede).
- pone storm towardne foreseah (Bede; Matzner). Gehalde
hine heofones cyning in pissum life ondwardum (Kentish
Charters, Alfred; A. S. R.). - Cf. also: Signes owtward
(Capgrave, Augustine).
N. Postposition in isolated cases of native adjectives
in Modern English.
Remembering all the many cases of inverted word- 213.
order that have been brought forward in this treatise we
ought not to be surprised if we were to find some author
or other in Modern English time using inversion of an
attributive adjective that is not of French origin and is not
qualified by an adverb nor co-ordinated with any other
attribute whether the reason be an attempt at gaining
the strongest possible emphasis, an affectation for the
satirical turn, a desire of deviating from the every-day Ian-
124
guage, or whatever it be. On the contrary, it is, it seems
to me, rather a matter of surprise that such instances are
not more frequent than they really are. The fact is that
ihey are very rare, and most of the cases that do occur can
be reduced to certain prototypes.
The following are the only instances I have found:
My implement, hight Joseph Leman, has procured me
the opportunity of getting two keys made to the garden
door (one of which I have given him, for reasons good);
which door opens to the haunted coppice (Clarissa). So sunk-
en and depressed it was, that it was like a voice under-
ground (Two Cities. Cf. cases where 'underground' is an
adverb!). My father's death . . . meant no more to me
than a week of rooms gloomy and games forbidden (King's
Mirror. « Games forbidden » is correct, =- «inhibation of
games»; cf. § 21. This has no doubt influenced the other
phrase). «Ah, so it is», muttered Evan, eyeing a print.
«The Douglas and the Percy: 'he took the dead man by
the hand' . . . .» And looking wistfully at the Percy lifting
the hand of Douglas dead, Evan's eyes filled with tears
(E. Harrington. Cf. « Douglas, deceased »; § 79).
214. In instances like the following the adjectives are per-
haps rather used adverbially than attributively:
Inland and along the Thames there were battles end-
less between them and the revenue people (= without end,
without any intermission, continually 1. Thackaray, D. Du-
val). Knights and squires numberless will thank you
(== without number, at all places and in all times. Meredith,
S. Belloni). The Prince had friends numberless in the ar-
my (Esmond). -- Compare with these: For 65 pounds addit-
ional you can get that music at any time (= in addition,
1 'Endless' is found postpositive also in Middle English: Desire
it to be lyghtynd with wysdome endles (Fire of Love, 1435). Into
dyrknes endles thai sail be kest (ib.). But compare § 207.
125
more, extra. 111. Lond. News; Poutsma. Cf. also: pre or
foure dayes continued; Fistula, 1400; and § 51).
Chapter XIV.
Adjective attributes qualified by 'how*, or 'too*,
and analogues.
Attributes qualified by 'how' or 'too' are placed be- 215.
fore the indefinite article, according to ABBOTT because
< we regard too great as a quasi-adverb», and because we
look upon how poor «as an adverbialized expression* *. -
STOFFEL (Studies in EngL, p. Q8) takes how just a man and
too just a man to be imitations of so just a man. -- How-
ever this be, certain it is that the same word-order is used
in Danish: Alt/or 0mt et F0lelseliv, Hvor fager en pande.
Scandinavian influence is perhaps therefore not impossible.
That the said word-order is old appears from such
quotations as these: How gret a sorwe suffreth now Arcite
(Chaucer, C. T.; Matzner). Than sholde I make to longe
a tale (Maundev. ; Matzner). It was to importable a losse
(Three Kings' Sons, 1500).
1. Too.
There is, however, no obstacle to putting an adjec- 216.
tive qualified by 'too' between the indefinite article and the
substantive. At first the adverb and the adjective may
have been regarded as a compound adjective (Cf. A too-
long withered flower [Rich. II, II: 1], and also 'overfull',
'overfond', etc.).
Examples: A too ready consent (Clarissa). She had
given a too easy admission to ... (Macaulay, Hist.). A too
Shakesp. Gram. § 422.
126
thankful heart (Sheridan, Rivals, III: 2). A too sagacious ob-
server (Eliot, Floss). A too frequent use of prepositions
(Hodgson, Errors in Engl.).
217. Thus always when 'too' is qualified by 'not': Per-
haps some apprehension might be felt even by a not too
impatient reader (Times; Poutsma, p. 346), and when the
noun has the deL article: The not too gracious bounty of
moneyed relatives (Sartor). The too hasty conclusion (Floss).
The too rigid insistance on a duty (Hodgson, Errors). The
already too long tale (Kruger).
218. Where emphasis is aimed at, postposition is used.
Examples: })e o5er is gaveling (usury) to grat, ase
ne^en for tuelf (Ayenb.). Lest my zeal . . . might drive me
into times too remote, and crowd my book with words no
longer understood (Johnson, Diet.). Fears that were un-
certain, and creditors too certain (Opium-eater). A freezing
arrest upon the motions of hope too sanguine that haunted
me (ib.). He was still sufficiently youthful not to be ac-
cused of wearing a flower too artificial (E. Harrington).
219. 2. How.
Postposition is much less frequent with 'how', although
it does occur: If any, then by a title how special could
my own mother invoke such a co-operation (Opium-eater).
In the following there is good reason for the inver-
sion: With sensations how different from . . . (Kenilworth).
220. 'However' has the same effect as 'how': However large
a fortune his father may have left him (Poutsma).
221. 3. Analogues.
By analogy of «too just a man» it was not uncom-
mon in older English to say for instance: Overgret a wit
(Chaucer; Abbott, § 422). They are purchased at over-high
a rate (Florio).
Hence through further analogy the same word-order
was, and is sometimes still, used in other collocations too:
127
The honour of seld-seene an amity (Florio). Big a
puzzle as it was, it had not got the better of Riley (Eliot,
Floss. Cf. «As big a puzzle as . .»!).
In the following instance 'poor' is best looked upon as an ad-
verb: It was upon this fashion bequeathed me by will but poor a
thousand crowns (= only. As you).
As for less just a man, what poor an Instrument, etc. 222.
I refer to ABBOTT, Sh. Gram., § 85, KRUGER, Synt., § 733,
and STOFFEL, Studies, p. Q4, where this matter is dealt with
in detail.
Chapter XV.
Adj. attributes qualified by 'so' ('as').
If an adj. attr. is qualified by 'so', the modern Eng- 223.
lish idiom allows this attribute to precede the noun only
on condition that an indef. art. separates the substantive
and its modifier. Otherwise 'such' is substituted for 'so',
or else inverted word-order is used 1. Thus: So strong a
power, Such cold weather, Such nice girls, People so unedu-
cated. A declaration of affection so conditional (King's
Mirror). - Kingsley has: In such strange a way (T. Y.).
Why the substantive will not tolerate 'so' -f adj. im-
mediately before it, it is not easy to tell 2. The same ar-
rangement is, however, met with in at least one more Teu-
tonic language, e. g. Dan. (Norw.) Elskog er sd stcerk en
magt (Ibsen, Haermendene). Cf. also 16th cent. Germ. So
ein geringes gelt (Hell wig, p. 127).
1 Not when the attribute is a pronoun, however: So few people,
so many books, so much money.
2 SWEET simply declares (N. E. Gr., § 1793) that in a constr.
like so long a time «the order is the result of avoiding the awkward
collocation a so long time*. Why is this colloc. more awkward in
Engl. than in German or Swedish?
128
224. The Anglo-Saxons expressed themselves in the follow-
ing way: Hie . . . cwaedon pet hit gemalic (disgraceful) waere
and unryhtlic paet swa oferwlenced cyning sceolde winnan
on swa earm folc (Alfr., Orosius; A. S. Read). Swa heane
lariowdom (Cura Past.). - Thus in Middle English after
'one' and 'none': per ne ys non zuo guod man (Ayenb.).
One so gentil and hye pry nee (Godf. of Bol., 1481).
As late as the transitional period between M. E. and
Mod. Engl. it was possible to say: A so new robe (Abbott,
§ 422).
225. The original construction was apparently that without
any article; and when it was inserted at last, one did not
quite know where to put it. Where no article was em-
ployed the normal word-order was the regular order in
M. E. and is also frequent enough in older Modern English.
Examples: poug- pei ben getyn bi nevere so fals title
(Wycliff, Of Clerks' Poss.). So mervelos and so spirituall
affeccion (Alph. of Tales). Never after ware so costios hose
nor shone (ib.). So grete and horrybyll strokes (Blanch,
and Egl.; 148Q). We have taken soo greate hurte (Th.
More, Rich. III). So hard terms (North, Plut.). Arrius and
Leo his Pope died both at several times of so semblable
deaths (Florio). Encircled with so horrible and great quan-
titie of snow (ib). So apparent cowardlze (ib.). With so
full soul (Tempest, III: 1). Our haste is of so quick con-
dition (Measure, I: 1). Nature never set forth the earth in
so rich taplstry (Sidney, Apol.; 1505). I have not found
so great faith, no, not in Israel (Auth. Vers., Luke, 7: Q).
- Even as late as Poe I find this construction: Should I
avoid claiming a property of so great value (Murder in the
Rue Morgue).
226. It was not until Queen Elizabeth's time that the present
usage became settled, but then it was already old enough,
instances of it being found both in Chaucer and Wycliff:
129
In so smal an instrument (Chaucer, Astrolabe). With so
benigne a cheere (Cant. T.; Matzner). So long a time (Wycl.,
Hebrews IV: 7; Abbott, § 67).
After a dem. or poss. pron. and the def. art. the old 227.
construction held its ground much longer:
These so strong bonds (Florio). These so frequent and
ordinary examples (ib.). The so presentient auscultator (Sar-
tor). The so passionate Teufelsdrock (ib.). These his seem-
ingly so aimless rambles (ib.). These seemingly so dis-
obedient times (Carlyle, Ess. on Scott). These otherwise so
powerful pieces (Carlyle, Ess. on Burns).
Through confusion of «This so pleasant path» and 228.
«So pleasant a path» a curious construction developed it-
self in the 17th century:
This so pleasant a path (Pilgr. Progr. *). Deliverance
from this so dangerous an enemy (ib.). What will be the
end of this so dreadful and so ireful a beginning (Bunyan,
H. War). This so weighty a matter (ib.).
In Present English 'so' -f- adj. is usually placed after a 229.
substantive preceded by a pronoun:
For that preparation so necessary (Xavier). My God ! and
for my degradation so tremendous (Light that failed). There
is no passion so cruel and selfish as love (Merriman, Sister).
- Or else: You shall stay in no such dull place (Esmond).
Postposition is sometimes also used when the subst. 230.
is preceded by the indef. article. At the outset postposit-
ion in this case was no doubt simply caused by analogy;
in Late Modern English it is only employed for the pur-
pose of emphasis or for similar reasons, e. g. in order
to avoid too many attributes before a (short) substantive.
Examples: The pulling of a knot so hard, so fast, so
durable (Florio). Happy am I that have a man so bold
WIDHOLM, Notes on the lang. of Bunyan.
130
(II, Henry IV, V: 2). Therefore it is good to take know-
ledge of the errors of a habit so excellent (Bacon, Good-
ness of Nature). He will not disgrace himself with a com-
parison so odious (Clarissa). A superiority so visible (ib.).
At a juncture so unexpected (Wakefield). To pursue a track
so smooth, and so flowery (Rambler). A monarch so great,
so ambitious, and so unscrupulous (Macaulay, Hist.). In a
manner so despotic (ib.). Gaiety was not foreign to a coun-
tenance so expressive (Durward). It were extravagant waste
of a commodity so rare (ib.). A being so unfortunate (ib.).
In a way so new and so admirable (Two Paths). To strength-
en an impression so desirable and useful (Twist). A phe-
nomenon so low and unaccountable (Two Cities). In a voice
so trumpet-tongued (Opium-eater). A notice so gratifying
(Venetia). The excitement of an experience so new (Pem-
berton, Xavier). With a smile so sweet, so benign, so sun-
ny-bright (Cardinal's Snuff-box). Out of a friendship so
unequal sprang . . . (Reid, Introd. to Ess. of Johnson).
231. At times we come across rather curious constructions
with 'so':
So mild a relenting and gentle kindnesse (Florio). So new
a fashion'd robe (King John, IV: 2) 1. No so hard a heart-
ed one (Butl., Hud.; Matzner, p. 567). -- Thus with 'as':
I have known as honest a faced fellow have art enough
to do that (Kenilworth).
Nor is the word-order in the following quotation to
be recommended: Warning me not to trifle with an en-
gine so awful of consolation and support (Opium-eater).
232. Where a participle is concerned it should be remem-
bered that in A statesman so trained 'so' usually means
«in that way», «thus», but in So trained a statesman it
means «in that degree*.
1 For other similar constructions in Shakesp. see ABBOTT, § 422.
131
Thus also: A Smithfield means a cattle or meat mark-
et, originally a market after the pattern of the London one
so called. But: A so-called ^Rhyme-Booker. 'So-called' is a
compound adjective.
When an attribute is preceded by as, the same rules 233.
are observed as where the adverb is 'so'. An abstract or
plural substantive stands before the attribute:
The great dignity that his valour hath here acquired
for him shall at home be encountered with a shame as
ample (All's well, IV: 3.). Other leaders have inspired their
followers with zeal as ardent (Macaulay, Hist.). Cruelty
as fierce may indeed have been wreaked and brutality as
abominable been practised before (Two Paths). Work done
by hands quite as rude and by minds as uninformed (ib.).
Was it certain that ever -again I should enjoy hours as
happy (Opium-eater).
Thus also in the case of emphasis: He loved to
dream of the past and conjure up a future as glorious
(Venetia). Compare: She found herself the centre of a circle
alike powerful, brilliant, and refined (ib.).
Otherwise: As straunge a man l (Chaucer, Melibeus;
Miillner). Then Britain should have had as rigorous a clim-
ate as Labrador (Poutsma). I do not think he was as
good a scholar (ib.). He is -as pleasant a man as any.
Thus if 'as' does not modify an adj., but another
adverb: Matters of as little practical importance (Macaulay).
1 In M. E. one could, however, say: Yet shoulde the realme
alway finde kinges and paradventure as good kinges (Th. More, Rich.
III). Thus even as late as Thackaray: There were as brave men on
that field (Esmond). — With a pronoun as attribute this word-order
is still used: As many people as . . . In as few words as possible.
Cf. So many people, So much gold. Here 'such' cannot, of course,
be used.
132
Chapter XVI.
Such.
234. 'Such' is etymologically == «so like». For this reason
it cannot be placed between the article and the noun in
Modern English: Such a man. Thus also in other Ger-
manic languages: Slig en mand. saadan en man; Sicken en
dumbom; Solch erne Verbindung. Similarly in older Eng-
lish also: Swillc an mann Alls Adam haffde strenedd (Orm.;
Matzner, p. 187). War-to liveth selke a wrecche (Wright,
Anecd.; Matzner). Suche a yong man (Alph. of Tales).
235. But before the construction 'so' -f- adj. -f- art. -j- noun
became settled, 'such' could be treated like ordinary ad-
jectives :
Er we an such kyng han y-founde (Wright, Pol. S.;
Matzner). A swuch bale bute bote (Sawles Warde).
236. If 'such' is completed by 'as', it may stand after the
noun, next to 'as' 1:
He graunted him a day, such as him leste (Chaucer;
Einenkel). Suerte suche as shall be thowght convenient (Cov.
L. B., 1427). He gave his wife a look such as his coun-
tenance could wear when angered (Van. Fair). I listened with
a pleasure such as that with which . . . '2 (Opium-eater). Con-
versation such as has been described (Fullerton, Bonneval).
Cases such as these (Molloy). Word-connecting adverbs
such as 'than' (Sweet; N. E. G.). An independent sentence
such as «it is true» (ib.). 3
1 Cf. Swed. Att just nu hogt prisa en handling, sddan som
Charlotte Corday utfort, var brottsligt (G. Janson).
2 Here 'such' is emphatic, and the word-order should be com-
pared with Swed. En osdkerhet sddan, ait hon knappt visste, med
vilken fot hon skulle stiga over en troskel (P. Hallstrom, G. Sparfvert).
8 Cf. also Fr. C'est le cas pour des verbes tels que . . .
133
POUTSMA cites further instances on page 427 and re-
marks: «Such is sometimes placed after the noun it quali-
fies, with the result that it makes a kind of unit with the
conj. as». Cf. also EINENKEL, Pauls Grundriss, p. 1143,
who says: »Im Ne. ist dies such as zu einer relativartigen
Partikel zusammengeschmolzen.»
But, of course, also: 237.
Such a combination as . . . (Sweet; N. E. G.). In such a
sentence as . . . (ib.). Such differences as those presented (ib.).
Chapter XVII.
Pronouns.
Certain pronouns are of great interest as regards their
place in the sentence.
1. All and both. The very word-order in all the 238.
gentlemen *, both the gentlemen, as compared to the old
gentlemen, indicates clearly enough that 'all' and 'both' can-
not be adjectives in the same sense as 'old'. - Thus also:
These fine books, the boy's fine books, my fine books, but :
all these books, all the boy's books, all my books, both these
books, both the boy's books, both my books.
'All' and 'both' should rather be considered as ad-
verbs of some kind. POUTSMA, p. 340: «They partake of
an adverbial character ». - Hence also their free position
in: The boys all •(= «with one voice», «unanimously») con-
sented. The soldiers were all (= «collectively») angry. The
two girls both began to cry. The gentlemen had both been
1 In Chaucer also: Al a yer (Einenkel, Pauls Grundriss). In Fi-
stula in Ano: al a ny§t.
134
officers1. — Thus in Anglo-Saxon: Ball wifa cynn (Ein-
enkel). Begen ofslegene wceron pa ealdormen (Sax. Chron. ;
Matzner).
239. In Old English these words were mostly put after
the noun, which SWEET (§ 1781) ascribes to their want of
emphasis. Whether they were unemphatic or not, I
leave to further discussion. I feel, however, inclined to
look upon 'all' and 'both' (or rather the old word ba to
which the def. art. has been added) as originally substan-
tive words, as is the case with several other pronouns,
with at least certain numerals, and probably also with
some quantitative adverbs. This explains both the fact
that they cannot be inserted between the article and the
noun, or between this and another pronoun (which is not
impossible with many ordinary adverbs), and also their
generally rather free position in the sentence.
Compare: A. S. Ealle poet flcesc })aet wilddeor laefan
(Alfred; Matzner), f>a sende se cyng aefter eallum his wit-
urn (Sax. Chron.), Begen pa beornas (Matzner); Goth. Alia
so hairda (Matth.; Matzner), Ba po skipa (ib.).
240. They must have governed a partitive genitive at first,
as for instance also in Beowulf: Sona haefde unlifigendes
eal gefeormod (Matzner, p. 282). This is the case with
'gehwa' in Anglo-Saxon (before or after the noun; Kube,
§ 35), and with several pronouns in Gothic: all manageins,
all gaskaftais (Matzner) ; filu manageins, leitil beistis (Streit-
berg, Got. El. Buch, § 262) 2.
241. The genitive could always be placed before or after 3:
1 Cf. also the following German sentence in which 'alle' looks
very much like a real ordinary attribute: 1st das langweilig die Vo-
kabeln hier alle zu lernen (E. A. Meyer, Deutsche Gesprache).
2 That a noun taking a part. gen. is apt to pass into a kind of
adj. is illustrated also by Germ. Eine Art Fisch, M. E. Know ye
whatkyn a token [>is is (Alph. of Tales).
3 Certainly its original place was that after the other noun.
135
Skatte fimf hunda, Manne sums (Streitberg). The word
'enough' will be good as a parallel: Water enough, as well
as Enough water. With a genitive: Eonne gife ic him pees
leohtes genog (Gen., 1000; N. E. D.); Enough of impudence
(T. Jones); Just enough of learning (Byron; Matzner). Cf.
also Germ. Genug der Tranen, Des Weins genug. — Instead
of all these tribes, both these plans we sometimes find all
of these tribes, both of these plans (Poutsma p. 217). Con-
struction with 'of is indeed the rule when the noun is
qualified by a relative: All of which letters, Both of whose
husbands (Poutsma).
As has already been stated, 'all' and 'both' were 242.
mostly placed after their head-words in A. S. This is also
sometimes the case, with 'all' at least, in older German:
Die ding alle, Die frawen alle (Hell wig, pp. 114, 115), Die
gliedmass des corpers alle (Luther; Hell wig, p. 126).
Postposition of 'all' occurs as late as Present English,
although it does not, of course, agree with the living
idiom, dialects possibly excepted.
a. Examples af postpos. of 'all': pas land eall (Alfr., 243.
Orosius; Milliner). Se J>e pcet ingedonc eall wat (Cura
Past.; ib.). Rice men alle (Sax. Chr.; ib.). Verod eall aeras
(Caedm.; Matzner). £a dyde he on his byrnan and his ge-
feran ealle (Sax. Chron., 1048). To pam witum eallum {)e . . .
(ib.). Sumorscete alle (Sax. Chron.; Kube). pa scipu alle
(ib.). My lordes alle that here be (Three Kings' Sons;
1500). My lord and you gentlemen all, this fellow I have
known of a long time (Pilgr. Prog.). Hear me, William
de la Marck and good men all (Scott, Durward). « Listen
to this, gentlemen all», said he (Norman Innes, Uncle Jabez;
Winds. Mag., Xmas 1909).
b. Examples with 'both' £aer waes ungemetlic wael 244.
geslaegen . . . and fa cyningas beg cvz ofslaegene (Sax. Chron.).
136
The parties booth (Chaucer, Melibeus; Milliner). Fare you
well, gentlemen both (II, Henry IV, HI: 2).
245. 2. Many. 'Many' also originally took a part, gen.;
cf. Goth, managai pize siponje (Streitberg). Hence its free
position in: Manige Cristes cyrcan (Einenkel, Grundriss).
246. Postposition is occasionally met with in Modern English,
when 'many' is modified by an adverb. But postposition
is very frequent in A. S. and occurs here and there in M.
E. and Eliz. Engl. as well.
Examples: Hlafordswican manege (Wulfstan's Address;
A. S. Reader). Her syndan . . . fule forlegene horingas ma-
nege (ib.). To hefegum byrQenum manegum (Cura Past.).
Dagas well manege (Blickl. Horn.; Miillner). i>a sealdon hi
him bysne monige (Bede's Eccl. Hist.). 1 Martires ful many
(Trevisa; Milliner). Good people verye manye have deserved
the revengaunce of God (Th. Lever, A Sermon; 1550).
As there be gods many and lords many (Auth. Vers., I Cor.,
VIII: 5). It sheared off heads so many that it and the ground
. . . were a rotten red (Two Cities). Friends enough and too
many among his fellow book-wrights (Two Years Ago).
247. As for many a man cf. MATZNER, p. 258, and EINENKEL,
Grundriss, p. 1 144. — Anal.: Lyke as other a tygre (Bl. and E.).
248. 3. More and much may be placed on a level with
'many'. Cf. gen. pees folces mycel ofsloh (Sax. Chron.,
626; Matzner).
Examples of postposition: And other murthes mo (Matz-
ner, p. 262). Her father and other knyghttes mo (ib.).
And many things more (Latimer, Sermon on the Ploughers;
1549). There is Christian, thy husband that was, with
legions more, his companions (Pilgr. Progr.). - - £y us is
pearf micel 2 })aet we ... (Wulfstan's Address, A. S. R.).
1 Cf. also: Swylce eac oper monig (Caedmon).
2 According to MULLNER, p. 39, «aufs Conto des lateinischen Ein-
flusses zu setzen», which is not probable.
137
Here is hunger and . . . odre wowe muchel (Rel. Ant. ;
Matzner, p. 272).
4. Other is sometimes placed after the noun when 249.
emphasized and completed by 'than' x:
But what if eyes other than his spied behind (D. Gray).
It is evident that the clauses having order other than «First»
or invested, are the exceptions (Me Knight, Prim. Order).
When preceded by consonants other than dentals (Jones>
Pron. of Engl.). Some syllable other than that which is
normally stressed (ib.). The acquisition of works by artists
other than Scottish (Studio, Nov. 1Q10). — In the following
quotation 'other than . . .' is appositional: He had no means
other than his salary (Winds. Mag., Aug. 1Q10).
5. Same. I have come across two instances of em- 250.
phatic postposition of «the same»:
On my passage I should meet with atmosphere essen-
tially the same as at the surface of the earth (Poe, Hans
Pfaal). Keats has the phrase «the winnowing wind»
a threefold iteration of syllables nearly the same (Bain,
Rhet. and Compos.).
6. Whatever precedes the noun if this is not qual- 251.
ified by another pronoun as well: We must make greater
progress with the dictionary at whatever sacrifice (Murray).
In other cases the noun comes first, owing to 'what- 252.
ever' not being an attribute, but the the pred. complement
of an abbreviated clause which it introduces itself: I felt
no anxiety whatever (= whatever it be). Without any know-
ledge whatever.
1. Whatsoever was formerly as a rule, and is some- 253.
times still, divided in this manner that 'what' stands be-
fore the the noun, and 'soever' behind.
Examples: It shall be lawfull for any man ... to use
Cf. § 308.
138
what advantage soever (Florio). Of what degree or dig-
nity soever (New Atlantis). Will be stragling abroad at
what perill soever (Earle, Micro-cosm.; 1628). Power of what
sort soever (Carlyle, Ess. on Scott).
Compare also German: Diese konnen sich nun in einzelnen
Sprachen, aus was filr Grtinden immer, verandern (Delbruck, Brug-
manns Grundriss).
254. 8. Possessives. In the oldest English the poss. pron.
often followed the substantive. This is not to be wond-
ered at, any more than the fact that other genitives can
have this place. A. S. 'his', 'heara' are real genitives: He
sende engel his (Merc. Hymns, A. S. R.), In hergum heara (ib.).
Postposition is frequent in other Teutonic languages
as well: Scand. Has fodur sins, /tad mitt (Hell wig, p. 20);
Goth. Leik mein, Naseins unsara x (Hell wig, p. 18); O. H.
Germ. Druthin got dhin, Gote unseremu (Hellwig, p. 54.)
Instances of postposition in O. E.: Lytel ic waes be-
twih brobur mine and iungra in huse feadur mines (Merc.
Hymns). ' Fingras mine wyrctun hearpan (ib.). Gecerred is
hatheortnis bin (ib.). To donne mildheortnisse mid fedrum
urum (ib.). Eis is sunu min leof (North. Matth.). Bread oure
eche dayes yef ous (Rel. Ant., Matzner). - - M. E.: And
agreid wij) hym J>at he sulde gett hym pe lyff hur (her
love. Alph. of Tales).
255. Inverted word-order was particularly frequent in the
vocative case 2:
Sunn min, ne todael du on to fela 9in mod (cf. the
difference! Cura Past.). Vader oure (Rel. Ant., Matzner).
Dryhten min (Andr., ib.). - This usage was also kept up
by Shakespear, at least in poetry. FRANZ (Shakesp. Gram.):
1 HELLWIG, p. 18: «Wie . . . erwiesen wird, stehen die Poss. meins
etc. eher nach als vor dem Nomen, auch wo das Griechische um-
gekehrt stellt*.
2 Cf. Germ. Lieben frawen min (15th cent.), Vater unser (Hell-
wig, p. 115). Cf. also Father dear etc., § 148 ff.
139
«Mlne in der Stellung nach dem zugehorigen Subst. (lady
mine, brother mine) begegnet gelegentlich als die Form
feierlicher and geftihlvoller Anrede». I have not found any
instance of this in Shakespear's prose.
Even certain modern authors sometimes use this 256.
archaic word-order in exclamations and in address:
Nay, sweet lady mine (Rienzi). In truth, lady mine, I
rejoice (ib.). Oh! mother mine! (Westward Ho! Poutsma).
Reader mine, if ever you go to Harrow ... (A. Besant,
Autob.; Poutsma). Oh, if thou shouldst ever be like that,
Berthold mine! (Ouida, Fame).
Q. A. S. ana ('alone') may also be classed among 257.
the pronouns. This word was usually put after its noun,
which is evidently due to its appo si tional character. Cf.
A. S. 'sylf, Germ, 'selbst'.
Examples: Monige })e fleof) for eaftmodnesse anre
(Cura Past.). Codes wisdomes anes (ib.). pa ping ana
(ib.; Milliner).
10. A. S. sylf, self is placed after for the same rea- 258.
son as 'ana': From ftcere dura selfre (Cura Past.; Milliner).
Ge eac swylce dead sylfne to f>rowianne (Bede).
Chapter XVIII.
Numerals.
1. Cardinals. 259.
I take all cardinal numerals to have been originally
substantives, not only 'hundred', 'thousand', 'twenty', etc.,
but also the smaller numbers. In the quality of substan-
tives they were at the outset accompanied by a part, gen-
itive. Thus it will be possible to account for the word-
140
order in: Theves he schal herberon neyer won (one; Hall.,
Freemas.; Matzner). Souls and bodies hath he divorced
three (Tw. Night, III: 4). Also: On pe fairest loan, pre pe
beste yles (Einenkel, p. 1143). - Compare, moreover, the
following sentences with 'none' (= not one): Hayir wered
he non, ne lynand wold he non were (Capgrave, St. Gilbert;
1451). Other of the apostles saw I none (Auth. Vers., Gal.
I: 1Q). Satisfaction can be none (Tw. Night, III: 4). Other
count of time there was none (Two Cities).
The transition from a noun into an adjectival numeral is illus-
trated by: pe pridde del mi kinedom l (Rob. of Glo.; Einenkel, Anglia
XVIII).
260. By reason of their origin, cardinal numerals could
stand before or after in the older language (cf. para scipa
[gen.] tu; Sax. Chron.). Postposition is not uncommon in
A. S.; in Modern English this is only met with in poetry
or poetic style.
Examples: Mid his eaforum prim (Caedmon; Matzner).
Ond J>a fengon ;£{)elwulfes suna twegen to rice (Sax. Chron.,
855). Comon J)aer scipa six to Wiht (ib., 8Q7). Hiera pegn
an (ib.; Kube). Smale bollen preo (Pop. Treat.; Matzner).
Ge neschulen habben no best bute kat one (Ancr. Riwle).
Spearmen 200 (Acts, 23: 23). - - Myself and children three
(Cowper, Gilpin; Kellner, Hist. Outlines).
261. In the same way: Make ready 200 soldiers and horse-
men threescore and ten (Acts, 23: 23). Nobody doubts but
that 'threescore' is a noun, not an adjective. Nevertheless
it can be employed attributively like other cardinals, getting
its place before the substantive by way of an ordinary
adjective: Wretched old sinner of more than threescore
years and ten (Two Cities). — Thus also 'fourscore': Even
though I lived for fourscore years and ten (Ouida, Pipist-
1 According to EINENKEL »angeglichen an half», which I do not
believe.
141
rello). Even: Threescore and ten miles (Franz). She was
a widow of about fourscore and four years (Auth. Vers.,
Luke, 2: 37).
In like manner: Ten miles and a half, but also: 262.
Zebra is about four and a half feet high (Just so
Stories). The barometer gave a present altitude of three
and three-quarter miles (Poe, Hans Pfaal). It is five and a
quarter miles in length (Daily Mail, July 6, 190Q).
We see how nouns pass into adjectival numerals.
Cf. also: One of the hundred or so deadly sins (P. Kelver).
2. Half, double, etc. 263.
'Half stands on a level with 'all' and 'both': it was
originally a substantive 1 only and could not stand between
the article (or pronoun) and its noun.
Heo healfne forcearf pone sweoran him (Judith; Matz-
ner). Halfe a man (Chaucer, Test, of Love). He schall
pay half a marke (Cov. L. B., 1421). Half the sum, half
a day, half my work. You have told me only half this
lady's story (Audley). I have half a mind to do it (More
correctly an adverb here: Swed. «till halften»).
Distinctly a substantive is 'half in such cases as: Fox
beat half the lawyers in the House (Clive; Poutsma). You
might turn the heads of half the girls in town (Don.jib.).
Where 'half stands immediately before the noun it 264.
has either lost its primary meaning, or else we must speak
of a compound:
A half loaf (Sweet, N. E. Or.). A long half minute;
a half-hour; a half-measure; a half-crown; only a half truth.
His half brother (Esmond). He invented a half-dozen of
speeches in reply (ib.). The half-memory falsely called im-
agination (Kipling, Many Inv.) -.
1 For the transition into an adj. compare: Mare then halfendele
a myle (Matzner, p. 218).
2 Cited from LEEB-LUNDBERG, Word-formation in Kipling. Lund 1909.
142
265. The Romance double, treble, and quadruple have
partaken of the construction of 'half : double the deficiency,
double his income; treble the number. At least quadruple
its usual duration (Kenilworth).
When they stand after the article or pronoun, they
form a compound with the substantive or have another
signification: A double game, the double windows, this dou-
ble journey.
Note. Also Dutch half and dubbel can have the same position
as Engl. half, doable (Poutsma, p. 216).
3. Ordinals.
266. The ordinal numerals in Henry the Fourth, Edward
the Seventh, etc. follow their head-words because they are
explanatory appositions added afterwards, just like
the adjectives in Pliny the Elder, Charles the Great (§ 152).
That is of course the reason why the ordinal can be
placed as it is in this quotation: Be j)e commaundment
of Innocent Pope pe pird (Capgrave, St. Gilbert; 1451).
Normal word-order is occasionally made use of when
the author wishes to make his style more dignified: The
trying reigns of the second Charles and the second James
(Opium-eater).
267. In A. S. postposition could be used in ordinary col-
locations too, as with other adjectives: Ymb wucan prid-
dan (Caedmon; Matzner).
268. Note especially the following construction in M. E. :
The reyne of the kynge Richard the Secund after the
conquest the X (E. E. Wills, R. Corn; 1387). In the yere
of our kyng Henry the VI:te the second (Cov. L. B., 1424).
The yere of Kyng Herri the VI the IX (ib., 1431).
This construction is evidently due to analogy with
«in the year» -f- card, and has certainly also been influ-
enced by the Latin. Cf. Anno domini Millesimo CCCC:mo
143
(E. E. Wills). Anno regni Regis Henrici sexti post conque-
stum Anglie decimo septimo (ib.).
In Chapter the first, Page three, etc. French influence 269.
is generally assumed (SWEET, N. E. G. § 1782. POUTSMA,
p. 336). As the same word-order is often used in Swedish
and German, it seems to me that this explanation is somewhat
arbitrary. The origin of this mode of expression is doubt-
less simply this, that, when people had become accustom-
ed to writing - - after the Latin pattern, that is true —
Chapter I, Page 3, they also took to reading the words
in the same order, and thus the numeral was kept behind
the substantive.
Instances without any article: In Conto Twelfth (Byron, D.
Juan; Matzner). Chapter twenty-fifth (Scott, Rob Roy; ib).
Thus it has also fared with the pronouncing of the 270.
date of the month. The fifth of February is usually written
Febmary(,) 5:th, and so it has come to pass that one can
say and write:
Boys who on November the ninth . . . were suffering
from a severe toothache, told me on November the tenth
the glories of Lord Mayor's show (Paul Kelver).
Chapter XIX.
Attributes qualified by <nof.
An attribute preceded by 'not' can stand before the 271,
noun *, and this is the usual order when the adjective is
negated by un- or in-. That pre-position is more freely
used in that case must be seen through the medium of
1 POUTSMA simply states (p. 332): » Adjectives may stand before
their head-words although modified by adverbs of time, adverbs in
-ly, or the word-modifying not».
144
the fact that 'not' and un- (in-) neutralize each other, so
that the negation and the adjective form only one positive
idea. Postposition is therefore in that case exclusively
employed for the sake of emphasis.
Examples of p re-position: The perhaps not unwilful
slights of those whose approbation we wish to engage
(Clarissa). A not unintelligent officer (Macaulay,Hist.). A not
unworthy rival (ib.). The Countess had a not unfeminine
weakness for champagne (E. Harrington). Lying at his door
in a not unwonted way (ib.).
Examples of postposition: [He] remembered this
part of his life as a period not unhappy (Esmond). An
event not unfrequent, for in those days ... (P. Kelver). The
man . . . was of a mighty nature not unheroical, a man of
the active grappling modern brain (Meredith, Tragic Com.,
Pref.).
272. In the case of other adjectives normal word-order
does not seem to be much favoured, exception being made
for the combination 'not' -f 'very' ('quite', 'altogether'}
+ adj., which group is felt to be equivalent to a single
word *, e. g.:
The ardent and not altogether disinterested zeal with
which . . . (Macaulay, Hist.). The not too gracious bounty
of moneyed relatives (Sartor). This nagging and not very
courteous chaff (Pudd'nhead Wilson). He plays a not very
conspicuous part in the story (Sweet, N. E. Or., § 1788).
Otherwise postposition is preferred:
Many have an opinion not wise that . . . (Bacon, Of
Faction). With features not dissimilar (Esmond). 2 The
1 It might be objected that 'not' does not here belong to, the
adj., but that is only a half truth.
2 Such an adjective might, however, be put on a level with
those in w/z-, in-. It is therefore possible that the word-order is em-
phatic here.
145
grace of God working in a heart not ill-disposed (Fullerton,
Bonneval). Verbs not auxiliary, except 'be' and 'have',
are resumed by 'do' (Lloyd, North. Engl.).
But there is an expedient frequently resorted to of 273.
getting rid of this often rather unwieldy arrangement, namely
that of substituting 'no' for 'not' (or 'a not'). According to
STOFFEL (Stud, in EngL, p. 106) this is «very rarely met with
in modern English*. I doubt very much whether this state-
ment is correct, but I am unfortunately not able to dis-
prove it by a sufficient number of quotations. I cite those
that I have come across:
To my no small pleasure (Florio). Looking forward
with no small anxiety to his fate (Esmond). He ... thought
of it with no small feeling of shame (ib.). With no very
well-pleased air (ib.). Standing in no common need of rest
(Nickleby). To the no small delight of a group of dimin-
utive boys (Pickwick). Peter Ruff returned ... in no very
jubilant state of mind (Pearson's Weekly, Jan. 1Q10). For
no very disinterested end (Two Years).
Also with adjectives in in-: Situated at no inconsider-
able distance from the place (Rienzi). Saying which in no
inaudible tones (Fl. Marryat, Her World).
Another expedient of avoiding art. -f- 'not' + adJ- + noun is
to place 'not7 before the article, as in: I myself, not the least afflicted
person on the roll (Opium-eater). A liberal-minded man, and not a
very rigid ecclesiastic (Christian). l
As to constructions such as No easie an apprentiship 274.
(Florio), Upon no better a ground (Coriolanus), I refer to
STOFFEL, Studies in EngL, p. Q5 ff.
1 Compare with this: It had infinitely a stronger effect on him
(T. Jones). The stars intimate yet a prouder title (Kenilworth). Mr.
Torpenhow's ten times a better man than you (Light that failed). -
This word-order is, it is well known, very frequent with 'rather' and
'quite'.
10
146
Chapter XX.
Attributes preceded by more than one adverb.
275. An adjective attribute may be preceded by two ad-
verbs, one of which qualifies the other, and it may never-
theless stand between the article (pron.) and the substan-
tive. SWEET (N. E. G., § 1788) lays down the following
general rule for this case: « Groups precede when pre-order
involves no awkwardness of construction, especially when
the group is felt to be equivalent to a single word, or
when the group may be regarded as a compounds
Above all, of course, this applies to the case of one
adverb being qualified by 'more' or 'most'; here we might
be authorized to say that only one compound adverb pre-
cedes the adjective. But many other combinations occur.
Examples: These now before rehercid thingis (Pecock,
Represser). The never-yet beaten horse (Ant. and Cleop. ;
Abbott). The almost equally unimaginable volume (Sartor).
That pretty-densely populated quarter (Pickwick). Her
scarcely less dear namesake (Two Cities). More easily broken
shells (Darwin). With not less disastrous consequences
(Venetia). The no longer mysterious door (ib.). The most
widely read book ever written (Editor's Pref. to Pilgr. Progr.;
People's Library). Thus also: In a clear, bell-like, for
ever memorable tone (Sartor). Our as yet miniature philos-
opher's achievements (ib.).
276. In instances like the following the first adverb be-
longs to the second adv. -f the adj., which two thus form
one idea, i. e. a kind of compound:
The perhaps not unwilful slights (Clarissa). His seemingly
so aimless rambles (Sartor). These otherwise so powerful
pieces (Carlyle, Ess. on Burns). An otherwise studiously
inexpressive countenance (Merriman, A small World). The
147
demon's really rather cogent intervention (Cardinal's Snuff-
box). Respectably ill dressed or disreputably poorly dressed
people (Shaw, Candida). - Thus also: So utterly sad a
scene (Carlyle, Ess. on Burns). So thoroughly judicious a
manner (Floss).
Even three adverbs may be allowed to stand before 277.
a prepositive attribute:
That perhaps not ill-written « Program > (Sartor). Much
more highly-instructed persons (Floss). Our Arabian Nights
and fairy tales seemed at last not altogether cunningly
wrought deceptions (King's Mirror).
Postposition in accordance with the common rules: 278.
I have known sons much more confidential (Thackeray,
Philip). An effect not less disproportionate followed out
of that one accident (Opium-eater). A value not otherwise
attainable (ib.). With an unconscious equanimity not less
diverting (Venetia). There was in his air just now a hint
of amusement most decorously suppressed (King's Mirror).
The group «more than usually (ordinarily, commonly)» 279.
does not prevent pre-position, which is all the more natural
as it only expresses one idea.- It is then in full accordance
with SWEET'S rule that the whole long attribute is placed
before the noun.
Examples: When there were some more than usually
interesting inquests (Twist). A more than commonly good
thing (Nickleby). A more than usually unpronounceable name
(Plain Tales). A more than ordinarily friendly soul blocked
the procession (Twain, Wilson).
Similarly, if the adjective is preceded by «more than», pre-order
is kept: With a more than ordinary vehemence (Rog. de Coverly).
One of those more than mad English girls (Light that failed). The
rays of the sun were reflected in more-than-oriental (sic!) splendour
(Just so Stories).
Cf. The man knew more than enough English for that (D-
Gray). The more than favour with which she accosted him (Kenilworth).
148
Chapter XXI.
Adjective attributes in adversative relation to
each other.
280. He made a manly but, at first, a vain effort (Scott);
A natural, although a very deep sigh escaped him (Poe). -
There is nothing remarkable in these sentences. But what
would be the word-order in case the article were not
repeated? POUTSMA (p. 332) answers thus: « When an adjec-
tive or a group of adjectives is in adversative relation to
another, or to an adnominal clause, they are often found
after their head-words. Instances of the alternative case
are not unfrequent».
Examples: {oas Dryhten geedleanades, swe folc dysic
(foolish) and nales snottur (wise. Merc. Hymns; A. S. R.). A
person small and emaciated, yet deriving dignity from . . .;
a brow pensive but not gloomy; a face, pale and worn but
serene (Macaulay, Hastings; Poutsma). A mind Intelligent,
if not brilliant (Venetia). In a language eloquent though
rude (P. Kelver). Manikins grotesque but pitiful crept across
the star-lit curtain (ib.). He has . . . a mouth resolute, but
not particulary well cut (Shaw, Candida). A «fake» is a
story invented, not founded on fact (Harper's Monthly, July
1893). He looked at her averted face, a profile soft and
lovable, yet full of . . . (Cosmop. Mag., Oct. 1910).
281. In reality, however, the matter certainly stands thus,
that this word-order is in Modern English only observed
when the substantive has a great deal less importance
than the attributes. Otherwise not merely «not un-
frequently», in consequence, but rather in most cases -
both the attributes precede the noun.
Examples: This low but not unuseful subject (Clarissa).
Those few, simple and familiar, yet whispered syllables
149
(Poe, Wilson). With an objectless yet intolerable horror
(ib.). A neighbouring though still somewhat distant parish
(Venetia). Like a faint, yet pleasing dream (ib.). With
a brief but ineffectual radiance (B. Harte, By Shore and
Sedge). A fierce though unequal conflict (Bain, Rhet. and
Comp.). With equal, yet different, effect (Studio, Oct. 1910).
Even : An integral but in many respects distinct part of
the United Kingdom (C. S. Fearenside, Mod. Spr. VI, 1910.)
In case of an adjective not compounded with un- negatived by
'nof repetition of the article is the best construction: A good but not
a gay horse (Kenilworth).
Appendix 1. To this section I also refer such rather 282.
rare combinations as the following:
In vain, because unguided, attempts (Poe, Gold-bug).
That half-pleasurable, because poetic, sentiment (Poe, House
of Usher). It exhibits no lofty and almost useless, because
unimitable, example of excellence (Irving, Sketchbook).
Appendix 2. It is by far the most usual to say: 283.
With features rather strong than pleasing (Kenilworth). 1 In
a manner practical rather than academic (Fearenside, M. S.,
Jan. 1911). Elsley had a dread more nervous than really
coward of infectious diseases (Two Years). Dick established
himself in quarters more riotous than respectable (Light that
failed). But Dickens has: That not more populous than
popular thoroughfare (Pickwick).
A rare construction is also the following: My as fair 284.
as noble ladies (Coriolanus II: 1). I have made a short as
well as early dinner (Clarissa). Having made this act of pru-
dent as well as just restitution (Kenilworth). He runs great
personal as well as political risks (Winds. Mag., July 1910).
I cannot produce any striking instance of pre-position of an ex-
pression with «both . . . and >. Instead of *A both pretty and rich girl we
say either: Both a rich and a pretty girl, or: A girl both rich and pretty-
Thus also: With indulgence as unbounded as injudicious (ib.).
150
Chapter XXII.
Attributes preceded by an adverbial phrase of
some length.
285. In English there exists, as is well known (cf. § 14),
rather great freedom as to the «attributizing» of whole
phrases, in one way at least. Thus:
A good-for-nothing husband (Her World). Well-to-do
professional men (Kelver). One of those hundred and sixteen
piece five-dollar-ninety-eight-marked-down-from-six sets of
china (Lorimer, Graham). A this-is-very-sad-but-I-need-the-
money tone (ib.). A Leeds to Hull goods train (D. Mail).
But here the whole of the more or less longish
phrase constitutes a simple idea and forms only one com-
plicated adjective.
286. On the other hand, placing an attribute preceded by
an adverbial adjunct of some length before the noun is
decidedly at variance with the principles of English syn-
tax. Notwithstanding instances do occur in Late Modern
English.
287. To meet with «by no means » preceding a prepos-
itive attribute is common enough and is, of course, quite
comprehensible, as the said expression has lost its orig-
inal meaning and has sunk to be a negative adverb, only
more emphatic than 'not'.
Examples: Her by means affectionate brother (Two
Cities). A by no means unusual circumstance (Slang Diet.).
A by no means pre-Raphaelite conclusion (Two Years).
In the same way «anything but» is equivalent to a
single adverb: The anything but settled use. l
1 Compare, however, also: With anything but an assured coun-
tenance (Her World). In anything but an enviable position (ib.).
151
But the following quotations are more interesting: 288.
This, I fear, cannot be said of our happily in all other re-
spects cleaner island (Ch. Weld, Vacation in Brittany; Poutsma).
Marcella was no longer a clever little imp, but a fast-
maturing and in some ways remarkable girl (Marcella). An
integral but in many respects distinct part of the United
Kingdom (Fearenside, Mod. Spr. VI, 1910).
POUTSMA declares the first of these to make «a lu-
dicrous effect». I cannot agree with him in this. When
the subst. has a poss. pronoun, it is always more natural
to place the attribute in front, as it usually mentions a well-
known fact. . In the last two quotations the word-order
may be due to the long distance between the article and the
attribute in question. It would have been grammatically
more correct to have repeated the article after 'ways' and
'respects', respectively.
The same applies to such cases where a whole sent- 289.
ence is the qualifier of the adjective, as in:
A silent, as it were unconscious, strength l (Sartor).
Then in a smooth, even, and what I may call reasonable
voice, she remarked . . . (King's Mirror).
Again, a combination like the following makes the
impression of being quite a free-and-easy mode of express-
ion: For I forget how many days, Peter and the Duchessa
did not meet (Cardinal's Snuff-box).
Concerning the attributive participle there are not a 290.
few cases of such preceding the head-word although ac-
companied by an adverbial phrase. In most of these,
however, we must look upon the long attribute as a com-
pound adjective. Cf. ABBOTT, Sh. Gr., §434: « Short phrases,
mostly containing participles, are often compounded into
1 Of course the adjective was here originally pred., but «as it
were» is now no longer felt as «as // it were».
152
epithets », e. g. The to-and-fro-conflicting wind (Lear). -
Further instances:
Yet my mind ceased not ... to have peculiar unto
it selfe well setled motions (Florio). I chanced to stumble
upon an high, rich, and even to the clouds-raised piece (ib.).
A twenty-years-removed thing (Tw. Night). A without-
pain-delivered jest (Lamb, Elia). Sheridan's brilliant, though
in its day much condemned, alteration (Introd. to Sheridan's
Plays, World's Classics).
291. Pre-position is particularly frequent when the adverbial
phrase contains the word 'times'. In the quotations from
more recent times we can hardly speak of a compound any
more in this case.
Examples: A jewel in a ten times barred up chest
(Rich. II). The most illustrious, six-or-seven-times-honoured
captain-general of the Grecian Army (Tr. and Cress., Ill: 3).
To pay a fifty-times repeated visit (Elia). Like a many-
times-repeated kiss * (Light that failed). A many-times-
told tale (Kipling, Kim; Leeb-Lundberg). A several times
repeated percussion (Lloyd, North. Engl.).
292. A passive infinitive can, when preceded by another
word, stand attributively before a substantive. We are
bound to regard the whole group as a compound adjective.
Examples: My ever to be revered mamma (Clarissa). Your
lordship's most beautiful and all-to-be-unmatched - Castle
of Kenilworth (Kenilworth). The never-to-be-forgotten whis-
per (Poe, Wilson). The never-enough-to-be-esteemed Gener-
al Post-office (Opium-eater). The not-every-day-of-the-week-
to-be-attained benefit (Poutsma, p.' 341. «Can hardly be
taken quite seriously»).
293. The only adverbial adjunct of some length that could
1 Kipling's hyphens do not count for much!
2 This is not of course, properly speaking, a passive inf. But
the likeness is obvious.
153
precede a prepositive attribute in Anglo-Saxon was one
denoting measure: Ond widutan J)aem dice is geworht
twegea elne heah weall (Orosius; A. S. R.). Suilc it ware
pre niht aid mone (Sax. Chron., 1132). - Thus also in
M. E.: To robbe a riche man of an hundrid markis worp
godis (Wycliff, De Off. Past.).
But in Modern English this word order is impossible,
except in stating a person's age: A ten-year-old boy, A
two-hundred-year-old grammar. In the case of a numeral
4- 'year' (uninflected plural!) the old word-order has sur-
vived up to our days, but the whole combination is now
looked upon as a compound word (Cf. A five-and-twenty-
mile walk. Pickwick).
If, however, the plural -s is added to 'year' the re-
ceived tradition is deviated from, and the attribute should
be placed after the noun. Notwithstanding, in opposition
to the rule: I looked across the terrace and saw Victoria's
three-years-old l girl playing about (King's Mirror).
Postposition may in other cases be avoided by omission of the
quantit. noun, as in: The hundred-strong («hundra man stark >) guard
packed before the obstruction in the tunnel (Royal Mag., July 1910).
Chapter XXIII.
Attributes preceded by an object.
The fact that pre-order is sometimes used even if 294.
the adjective is accompanied by a dative must be regard-
ed as a noteworthy omen, showing the direction of de-
velopment in this respect. Instances are, of course, as yet
comparatively rare.
1 The hyphens are of no real importance!
154
Examples: On that to me memorable evening (Words-
worth; Poutsma). Under the to me unmeaning title (Car-
lyle; Einenkel, Grundriss). After this remarkable and to
Scotland most disgraceful transaction (W. S. Tal., 4;
Koch, Hist. Gram., p. 174). She contrived still to speak
on the, to her, ever-interesting subject (Venetia). The mighty
men of old who had penetrated into these, to them, re-
mote regions (Brown, V. C.). Many of their (to us) pecu-
liar usages (Verity, Coriolanus; Notes). He exhibited such
a • faculty for apt, but to the brothers totally incomprehens-
ible quotation (E. Harrington). The accidental charm of
his graceful, though to him only half-serious, fopperies
(D. Gray). By which term Heale indicated the, to him,
astounding fact that . . . (Two Years Ago).
295. I have even noted down a few cases where an attrib-
utive present participle has an accusative object and never-
theless precedes the noun. As yet we must, I think, set
such- phenomena down as specimens of word-formation.
Examples: To an ambitious and fame aspiring mind a.
man must yeeld little (Florio). Olive-branch-bearing doves
(Audley). The last sketch representing that much enduring
man (Light that failed). The all-surpassing interest (Verity,
Hamlet; Introd.).
296. The same is applicable to the case of a prepositive
participle accompanied by a predicative complement, as in:
I will . . . pluck the borrowed veil from the so seeming
(cf. «so-called») Mistress Page (M. Wives, III: 2). The dark-
growing moor (Sartor). l
T Cf. Swed. Skjutit den oegennyttiga karleken i bakgrunden och
pa dess tom-blivna iron satt upp nagra klumpiga avgudar (Fr. Hed-
berg, Hero och Leander).
155
Chapter XXIV.
Attributes followed by a qualifier.
If an adjective or participle is followed, not preceded, 297.
by some qualifier, it cannot stand attributively before a
noun. That one can, and could, nevertheless say: They call
him a babishe and ill brought up thyng (Ascham, Schole-
master), She is a well-brought-up and religious young woman
(Thackeray, Philip), is .of course owing to the fact that the
participle and the adverb make up a unit so as to form a
compound adjective. Such is naturally also the case
when a preposition which is necessary to the verb is
tacked on to the participle. It appears from the very pro-
nunciation that a composition is present.
Examples: That little booke of unheard of wonders
(Florio). This unhoped for victory (ib.). I love not this
relative and begd-for sufficiencie (ib.). He mangles poore
foules with unheard of tortures (Earle, Micro-cosm.). Over-
refining and overdefining can seldom reach their wished-
for end (Clarke, Gram, of the Engl. Tongue). A small but
much-sought-after school for young ladies (Marcella). The
talked-of tutor had not yet arrived (King's Mirror).
There is, however, one case in which an attribute 298.
followed by its adverb is placed before the noun. This
is when the adverb is 'enough*.
Three different arrangements are possible when the
attribute is qualified by 'enough': 1) The word-order most
in accordance with the English idiom: I have reason good
enough (Tw. Night, II: 3). Answers satisfactory enough
(Hope, God in the Car). With a natural merriment about
her attractive enough (King's Mirror). [Cf. Some system
more corrupt still. Macaulay]. - 2) With the adj. before
156
and the adv. after the noun: An honest fellow enough
(Shakesp.; Matzner). A snub-nosed, common-faced boy enough
(Twist). A well-meaning woman enough (Nickleby). It was
a becoming robe enough (Two Cities). A shabby, dirty-
looking box enough (Audley). She was a pious maiden
enough (Ouida, Umilta). A doleful hole enough (Two Years
Ago). l [Cf. It would have been a stranger contrast still.
Nickleby]. 3) With both the adjective and the enclitic
adverb before the subst. This arrangement is comparatively
new and is not mentioned by MATZNER. ELLINGER, Engl.
Stud. XXIV, gives some instances of it. I will add some
myself, all belonging to Modern English:
The natural enough excuse of his lady's insanity
(Kenilworth). In dreary enough humour (Sartor). You're
a good enough fellow in yourself (Fl. Marryat, Her World).
Pleasant enough fellows (Merriman, Goloss-aal). A willing
enough beast (Merriman, The Mule). This here's a strange
enough world (E. Harrington). For most of us life is a
tolerable enough business (King's Mirror). [A better still
book?]
299. In all these quotations 'enough' has its weaker sense
of 'rather', and the strange-looking word-order is evidently
made possible by the fact that the adj. and the adv. are
pronounced in one breath (Cf. «nice-and-warm»!).
The word-order in question has, however, also spread
to cases where 'enough' has a more independent, i. e. its
primary, meaning ('sufficiently'):
I was a meek enough wife to endure it without flinch-
ing (Fr. Moore, Rosamund's Lady; Winds. Mag., May 1Q10).
1 In the foil. quot. 'enough' belongs with all probability to the
noun: And f>er he sulde hafe glide wyne enogh, and clarett (Alph. of
Tales).
157
Quite a large enough village to be called a town (ib.). You
have not heavy enough rains for a flood L.
The phenomenon here illustrated is very interesting,
as it proves that the resources of English in the matter of
an easy arrangement of the words are as yet far from
being exhausted.
In such constructions as Six more persons, In one 300.
more respect it looks as if we had another instance of the
above word-order. This is, however, only seemingly.
MATZNER says on page 260: «Schwer ist es fur das
moderne Sprachbewusstsein in manchen Fallen zu entschei-
den, ob more als Adverb oder als Adjektiv anzusehen ist.
Englische Lexikographen nehmen more in der Verbindung
mit bestimmten und unbestimmten Zahlwortern fur ein
Adjektiv in der Bedeutung von additional*.
Whether 'more' is here to be looked upon as an
adverb or not is totally immaterial. At any rate, if it is
not an adjective here, it is not an adjective in More per-
sons, More money either. But thus much is certain: it
cannot possibly belong to the numeral in Six more per-
sons, because a numeral cannot be modified by such an
adverb.
I quote some of Matzner's examples:
That he might have one more look at the day (Ma-
caulay, Hist.). There might be one more motive (Byron, D.
Juan). Twelve more tragedies (Taylor a. Reade, Masks).
Many more stories (Andrew). I add one from M. E.:
Monie mo hweolpes (Ancr. Riwle).
1 Uttered by an Australian-English lady.
158
Chapter XXV.
Crosswise word-order.
301. 1. If an attribute is completed by a following adjunct,
it must according to general rules be placed after the noun.
We have, however, seen the cross-arrangement possible
when the adjunct is 'enough' or 'still'. But a similar
arrangement considerably more daring was used by authors
of older times J:
If he fynde wij)in f>e lure ane hard ping as a stone
(Fistula). That a swift blessing may soon return to this
our suffering country under a hand accursed (Macbeth; verse).
With declining head into his bosom (Shrew, III). A long
parted mother with her child (Sh.; Einenkel, Grundr.). I
found Friday had still a hankering stomach after some of
the flesh (Crusoe).
Such word-order is all but inconceivable in Late Mod-
ern English. Therefore the following is a striking case:
That will be an accepted type by everybody (Two Paths).
302. O° the other hand, it is - - and was - rather com-
mon for an ordinary adjective and its prepositional
complement to be separated by the noun, as soon as the
prepositional phrase may be said to belong just as much
to the noun -f- adj. as to the adjective alone, or whenever
the prepositional phrase might be felt as an afterthought.
Examples : Two weren grete men of name and havynge
(Wycliff, Leaven of Phar.). Able men af kunnynge and lif
(ib.). Syzile . . . was ... the next Reaume unto the mys-
bilevers (3 Kings' Sons). The chiefest noble man of blood
1 Not only in the case of an adj. attr., but also for instance:
The kynges sone of Ireland (Morte Darthur; Einenkel, Grundriss).
The archbishop's grace of York (Sh.; ib.).
159
(North, Plut.). A stout man of nature (ib.). A common
custom among us (Florio). A dear manakin to you (Tw.
Night). A happy gentleman in blood (Rich. II). Your lordship
is the most patient man in loss (Cymbeline, II: 3). I am ....
a far weaker man by nature than thou art (Pilgr. Progr.).
My mind seemed to be in a suitable frame for so outrage-
ous an execution (Crusoe). The most pernicious thing to
my health (ib.). It became a fit mantle for a prince (Kenil-
worth). Father Holt was a very kind man to him (Esmond).
In the next pew to her (ib.). A pretty useless thing for
him (Pickwick). An unsatisfactory sort of things under any
circumstances (ib.). The most popular personages in his
own circle (ib.). A reasonable assumption at the close of
November (Opium-eater). That was by no means a new
idea to Maggie (Floss). This is a common story among the
vulgar in Gloucestershire (Verity, Hamlet; Notes). He was
a fairly humane man towards slaves and other animals
(Twain, Wilson). The old Cant is a common language to the
vagrants of many descriptions (Slang Diet.). Your Cohort's
the next tower to us (Kipling, Puck).
Such is the only possible word-order with «last (next)
but one»: The last (next) syllable but one; and in such
cases as: The second house from the corner.
The same peculiarity is found in older High German: Ein . . .
starker mann von kreften. Ein grosser, gerader mann von lib and
person (Hellwig, p. 114).
In one case the above word-order seems by and by
to become the only one used, namely in the case of ad-
jectives of similitude and dissimilitude. That the crosswise
arrangement is preferred with such a word as 'different'
is probably to be accounted for by the fact that « different
.... from» is equivalent in meaning to « other . . . than».
Than' introduces a clause (which may be curtailed) and
is not, therefore, so closely connected with 'other' as is the
160
preposition with the adjective that takes this preposition.
This theory is, it seems to me, confirmed by instances
like the following: A far different cause than the real one
{Venetia).
Besides, the preposition after the said category of
adjectives has a more general sense («compared to», <in
relation to»), i. e. it comes very near a conjunction \ Com-
pare 'to' (which is also used after 'different') in:
A person of very superior capacity to my own (-
«higher cap. than..*; Elia). A very superior stamp of man
to himself (Two Years Ago). That noble Earl . . . had found
himself in a subordinate situation to Leicester (= «a less
high sit. than . . .»; Kenilw.). An inferior poem to . . . (Kriiger).
The preposition may then here, on still better grounds
than above, be said to belong to both the adjective and
the noun, or, in other words, to the whole expression
adj. -f- noun.
Examples: They are of a far different disposition from
the Jews in other parts (New Atlantis). A quite different
kind from our European cats (Crusoe). Is your duke made
of a different metal from other princes (Durward). People
who have different tastes from his (Thackaray, Ess. on
Whitebait). Quite a different bearing to that of the Cam-
bridge student (Esmond). A being of different order from
the bustling race about him (Sketchbook). A very diff-
erent man from the prisoner (Two Cities). «Come», said
the leader in a very different tone to the one in which . . .
(Venetia). She is altogether a different being to the wretch-
ed helpless creature who . . . (Audley).
But, of course: A function different from and vague/-
than that of the same conjunctions (Sweet, N. E. G.). -
1 Cf. She had taken the illness on the same day with Esmond
<H. Esmond). 'With' here stands for the conj. 'as'.
161
And, when the adjective has more emphasis: In a tone so
different from his own (Kenilworth).
Other adjectives denoting dissimilitude and such 304.
as denote similitude have followed the example set by
'different'.
Examples: Davyd was ... of like age to Surnome
(Three Kings' Sons). ' Let us take a cleane contrary way from
the common (Florio). In the opposite extremity to the place
where thou art known (Kenilworth). They seemed to en-
tertain similar opinions with the syndic 1 (Q. Durward).
He had seen similar lists to these (Two Cities). The op-
posite direction to the natural current of the river (Opium-
eater). They advanced to the opposite declivity to that which
they had descended (Venetia). In the opposite direction to
the one she desired (Floss). A separate chamber from the rest
of the imprisoned offenders (Ouida, Umilta). A Cognate
Object because it is of kindred meaning with the verb
(Onions, Syntax). A similar case to mine (Daily Mail).
Examples with the adj. 'superior', 'inferior', and 'sub-
ordinate' have been given in § 303.
2. Crosswise word-order is also the most common 305.
when the adjective is supplemented by an infinitive.
Examples: Then was it a mervailous thinge to se, and
a faire (Three Kings' Sons). A likely plot to succeed (Sher-
idan, Scarborough). What a pleasant thing filial piety is,
to contemplate (Nickleby). A very desirable person to know
(ib.). The correct thing to do (P. Kelver). It seems an
absurd question to ask, but the fact is ... (Light that failed).
The verbal supplement is here best regarded as a 306.
posterior explanatory (often superfluous) addition which
does not belong to the adjective only. When this is not
1 Here it is quite clear that the prep, does not belong to the
adj. only. Cf. The same opinions as the syndic.
11
162
the case, postposition is used, as in: It was an invitation
too tempting to resist (= an invit. so tempting that it could
not be resisted). A charm too sweet to withstand.
307. 3. The natural continuation of a comparative is a
clause with 'than'. As this clause is necessary to the context,
the comparative and the conjunction are in very near rela-
tion to each other. l Hence one would expect inverted
word-order when a comparative followed up by a 'than'-
clause is used attributively. In most cases, however, the
conjunction may be looked upon as belonging to the unity
of adj. -f- noun, and by consequence normal word-order is
made use of, just as in «A subordinate situation to Leice-
ster^ «An absurd question to ask».
Examples: Ane wurse man pane }DU art (Vices and
Virtues; 1200). A better nature than his own (Bacon). For
a much longer space of time than 3 minutes (Twist). Even
a shorter allowance than was originally provided for them
(ib.). Within a less distance of the ground than his own
height (ib.). To these pursuits ... the little Doctor added
a more Important one than any (Pickwick). The worse fate
than being blind yourselves (Ruskin). Far greater poets than
Burns (ib.). A much more substantial man than he really
was (Floss). — Always: In more ways than one (Snuff-box).
308. Again, if 'than' belongs to the adjective alone — and
this is the case when the attribute is emphatic and thus
outbalances the noun - - then inversion is in its place.
Examples: An amyse (amice) mor precious pan I am
wone to were (Capgrave, Augustine; 1450). The English
government was . . . regarded by foreign powers with re-
spect scarcely less than that which . , . (Macaulay, Hist.).
An interest deeper than aught concerning earth only could
1 Than' is not so indispensable after 'other' as it is after an
ordinary comp., 'other' having passed into an absolute comp. Hence,
what is said here is not at variance with what has been said in § 303.
163
create (Kenilworth). And don't young men always begin
by falling in love with ladies older than themselves (Philip).
When he unexpectedly made his appearance, in health no
worse than usual (Poe, Ragged Mountains). They use
phrases much stronger than naturally belong to their thoughts
(Opium-eater). The attention of people wiser than myself (ib.).
It seemed to me ... to have roots deeper than any acci-
dental occurence (King's Mirror). In a voice lower than her
usual tones (ib.). A swindle more energetic and less skilful
than the rest (Marcella). The big drops pelted the river
like bullets, sending up splashes bigger than themselves
(Snuff-box). The voice reaches notes much higher than the
upper limit of ... (Savory a. Jones, Sounds of the Fr. lang.).
Appendix. 309.
Before leaving this section, I will take the opportunity
of mentioning one more kind of remarkable word-order,
namely that of a prepositional phrase, or the like, being in-
serted between the substantive and a postpos. attribute.
Examples: /// quisshonus of the same colour unstopped
(E. E. Wills, 1434). A litill panne of brasse y-ered (ib.).
In pe day, forsojje, folowyng (Fistula). Tuo knottis or J:>re
unlouseable (ib.). He ... did things, as it is written, won-
derful and incredible (North, Plut.). There are some laws
and customs in this empire very peculiar (Gulliver). { With
a triumph over her passion highly commendable (Andrews).
An effect, however, widely different (T. Jones). There are
several other strokes in the First Book wonderfully poetical
(Addison, Spect; Febr. 16, 1712). * There were household
officers, indeed, richly attired (Q. Durward). A circumstance,
in fact, little remarkable (Poe, Wilson). A ... kindness that
left an impression upon my heart not yet impaired (Opium-
eater). With a natural merriment about her attractive enough
1 But compare also § 11.
164
(King's Mirror). My thanks to you most sincere (Harrington).
Her voice had a running sob in it pitiful to hear (Plain
Tales). I've shot and hunted every beast, I think, shootable
and huntable (Two Years Ago).
Thus formerly also with 'something': A shudder that
had something in it ominous (Q. Durward). This solitude
has something in it weird and awful (Rienzi).
Chapter XXVI.
«Umschliessung». *
310. «Some way or other» is a well-known phrase. The
two pronouns exclude each other, and so this arrangement
of the words is the logically correct one; 'some' and 'other'
belong each to one 'way', 'other' standing for 'another',
which also occurs, e. g. At some hour or another (Rambler).
Who . . . hath . . . not worshipped some idol or another
(H. Esmond). All of them bearing, in some way or another,
the name of Boyce (Marcella); also «the other»: In one
sense or the other (Carlyle, Ess. on Scott).
311. The matter stands in exactly the same way whenever
two adjectival words, one of which is the contrary of the
other, are co-ordinated by means of 'and' or 'or'.
Examples: Aegder ge godcundra hade ge woruldcundra
(Cura Past.; Mullner). Berenne kyrtel otte yterenne (Voy.
of Othere; A. S. R.). Ne rice men ne heanne (Sax. Chron.;
Mullner). Assoylinge of suche confessours hap lytel vertu
or non (Wycliff, Of Confession). BringiJ) furj>e litel frute
1 The expression is borrowed from MTLI.NKR, although he takes
it to mean something more than I do.
165
or noon (Imit. Christi; 1441). Ye make . . . little counten-
aunce, or noon (Three Kings' Sons; 1500). Suche worries
and semblable (ib.). A nonne in whyte clothes and blacke
(Morte Darthur). The hunting of redde dere and fallowe
(Elyot, Governour). Merry faces and sad, fair faces and
foul, they ride upon the wind (P. Kelver). In the literal
sense and figurative (Verity, Henry V; Notes). 1 By fair
means or foul. 2
Numerals always exclude each other; therefore: 312.
pe pridde article and pe vifte (Ayenb.). I putte in tuo
tentes or pre (Fistula). Fyve tymes or seven (ib.). WiJ)in ane
howr or II after (Alph. of Tales). Where might not come
past // horses or III (Three Kings' Sons). A pinnacle or
two shining in the sun (Esmond). The third article and the
fifth (Ayenb. ; marginal note by the editor). A day or two 3.
Thus also: For three hours and more (Kingsley; Matz- 313.
ner). Forty bodies and more (Two Years Ago). During
the past year or two I have been ... (C. S. Fearenside,
Mod. Spr., VIII, 1909).
Thus likewise with poss. pronouns: My father and 314.
yours. 4
In many languages standing on a less elevated plat- 315.
form in general the word-order above exemplified is a
characteristic trait, however, and is indeed the rule not only
where two attributes excluding each other are concerned,
1 Cf. Swed. Svarta hjartan och roda (D. Fallstrom). Danska
bekymmer och svenska (Sv. Dagbl.).
- In the case of ordinary adj. this mode of expression is in
Present Engl. chiefly limited to that standing phrase, although anybody
might say, for instance: In fine weather and (or) bad. Compare also:
It was a chivalrous boast but vain (Xavier).
3 In mod. Engl. usually: Two or three days, The third and (the)
fifth articles. Only one or two doubtful cases (Two Years).
4 EINEXKEL, Anglia XVIII: «H6chst selten stehen beide vor dem
Subst.; n. e. In defence of our and your enemies (Fliigels Leseb.).» -
Thackeray has: Yours and her very humble servant (Esmond).
166
but also wherever two or more attributes, or in fact any
kind of sentence-elements, are co-ordinated. Compare for
instance:
Old Norse Kynstorr madr ok rikr (Hell wig, p. 19); 1
Old High Germ. Guoter dinge unde ntitzer (Hellwig,
p. 10Q); Old French Se Deu plest et Saint Esper/te
(Einenkel, Anglia XVIII, p. 153). A. S. For f on heo neowe
syndon and uncude (Bede); Ongiett poet hit self dys/g
sie and synfull (Cura Past.); pa het se cyning his hea-
fod of aslean and his swidran earm (^Elfric); Ines
brofjur and Healfdenes (Sax. Chron.; Kube); And reesp
(rushes) suide do/I/ce on celc weorc and hrasd/ice (Cura
P.); Gedence hu he gehwelcne Iceran scyle and hwonne
(ib.). M. E. Godes luve and mannes (Vices and Virtues,
1200); To clepie god to wytnesse, and his /noc/er(Ayenb.,
1340); That right wyse was and subtyll (Blanch, and
Egl, 1489).
316. Examples with two or more adj. attributes in A. S.
and M. E.:
Seo burg waes getimbred an fildum landa ond on swide
emnum (Orosius; A. S. R.). Hwittra manna and fcegerra
(Bede). God man and clcene and swide cedele (Sax. Chron.).
Becume to godum men and to wisum (Boethius; Kellner's
Introd. to Blanch, and Egl., p. CV). As a voide stomake
and a lere worchi}) in h itself (Trevisa). - To zygge vayre
wordes and y-slyked (Ayenb.). Olde rotid woundis and
stynkynge (Science of Cir.; 1380). In a foul stynkynge stable
and cold (Wycliff, Leaven of Phar.). It is a gret vertue and
an happy (Fistula, 1400). A mervolos maner, and a wrichid
1 «Von zwei Adj. steht das eine gewohnlich nach mit ok»
('and7; Hellwig, p. 19).
2 The modern arrangement occurs, though very rarely, also in
the oldest lang., e. g. Mid myclum and hefegum gefeohtum-(Bede).
Se wisa and fcestrceda Cato (Boeth.; Matzner). Mamgeforemcere and
gemyndwyrde weras (ib.). — Cf. Matzner, Gramm., p. 292.
167
(Alph. of Tales). A moche fayr cyte and good (Godfr. of
Bol.; 1481). Ye have, dy verse tymes and many, herde speke
of ... (Three Kings' Sons, 1500). She was called a right
fair lady, and a passing wise (Morte Darthur).
As late as Early Modern English this construction 317.
is not uncommon:
To ryde suerly and clene on a great horse and a
roughe (Elyot, Governour; 1531). A blue eye and sunken
(As you, III: 2). Are you good men and true (Much Ado,
III: 3). Good sparks and lustrous (All's well, II: 1). An
honest gentleman, and a courteous, and a kind, and a hand-
some (Romeo, II: 5). They were young men and strong
(Pilgr. Progr.). With melodious noises and loud (ib.). They
being a simple people and innocent (Holy War; Widholm).
He would shew me a better way and short (= shorter? P.
P.; Widholm).
Even in 18th and IQth century English the same ar- 318.
rangement of the attributes is occasionally found without
any contrast being expressed, but then intentional imita-
tion of the older style is certainly underlying.
Examples: »A good sentence and a true», said Varney
(Kenilworth. The scene is the time of Queen Elizabeth!).
She is a good Queen and a generous (ib.). Now Mr. Bum-
ble was a fat man and a choleric (Twist). Mr. Stryver was
a glib man, and an unscrupulous, and a ready and a bold (Two
Cities). Rudolf of Saxony, a brave man and a true (Ri-
enzi). A tedious race perhaps and pig-headed (Marcella). 1
In older English such word-order was likewise em- 319.
ployed with composite numerals:
Ymb tu hund wintra and syx and hundeahtatig aefter
|)aere Drihtenlican mennyscnysse (Bede). // pusend Wala
ond LXV (Sax. Chron.). pritty yere and pre (Trevisa;
1 Compare also: It's a long story and a sad one (Kingsley, Two
Years Ago), which is a more modern way of putting it.
168
Mullner). Two hondred feet and sixty (ib.). Twenty degress
and oon (Chaucer; Einenkel, Anglia XVIII). A hundred ger
and fifty (Capgrave, Aug.; 1450).
Imitated in more recent language: Ninety years old
and nine (Gen., 17: 24; Einenkel, Anglia XVIII). Three hund-
red spears and three (Scott, L. Minstr.; ib.).
Always: A thousand nights and one (Einenkel).
320. Thus also up to this very day with 'half, 'quarter',
'threescore', etc.: prie and prihti wintre and an half (Vices
and Virtues, 1200). 5 degrees and an half (Maundev.).
pre score myle and sixtene (Trevisa; Mullner). He turns
me at three-score years and ten adrift upon the earth (Ch.
Reade; Poutsma, p. 188). Cf. §§ 261, 262.
Chapter XXVII.
The reciprocal order between two prepositive
attributes.
321. As to the reciprocal order between two or more attri-
butes belonging to the same noun and not connected by
'and' ('or') or separated by a comma, SWEET (TV. E. G., §§
1789, 1791) lays down the following rules: «When a noun
has more than one modifier, the general principle is that
the one most closely connected with it in meaning comes
next to it. - - Qualifiers come before such groups, the one
that is the most special in meaning coming next to it: A tall
black man, The three wise men, Bright blue sky. - When
the modifiers are about equally balanced, the order may
vary as in the two first weeks, the first two weeks. » •
That the adjective and the noun are «closely connected in
meaning* is here evidently as much as to say that they
169
constitute one idea ajid may be regarded as a compound
substantive.
Compare the following quotations:
A worthy honest man (Swed. «hedersman». Florio).
Good sweet sir; (Winter's Tale, IV: 3). My dear young man
(Nickleby). Any cautious worldly advice (ib.). A saucy upturned
nose and a pair of changeful grey eyes (Brown, V. C.). Some
vague mental distress (B. Harte). Mutual logic dependence
(Sweet). A voiced pure fricative (Jones, Pron. of Engl.).
It is for this reason that 'old', 'young', and 'little' are 322.
mostly placed next to the substantive, since they have usu-
ally no real meaning of their own, but are rather nearly
superfluous when the noun has other attributive modifiers
as well.
Examples: pis seli olde man (R. of Glo.; Matzner).
Wise old men (Chaucer, Melibeus; Mullner). A low litylle
dore (Maundev.; Matzner). A blak litel cruste (Fistula). //
fayr yong men (Alph. of Tales). A gude holie aide man
(ib.). Davyd was a goodly yonge man (3 Kings' Sons).
As beautiful a little gipsy as eyes ever gazed on (Esmond).
But: The olde good loos (Melibeus). A lytylle round 323.
hole (Maundev.). He had done him a litle sober trispas
(Alph. of Tales). So J)er was a noder yong strong fellow
(ib.). A young English doctor, Old French wine, A little
white cat. To swallow up all young fair life (Two Years).
Here the adjectives 'little', 'old', and 'young' are not
merely used as terms of affection.
As far as 'little' is concerned, usage seems, however, 324.
to be unsettled. RICHARDSON, for instance, most frequently
places this adjective before the other ] : Here I am, at a little
poor village; We could not reach further than this little
poor place; Like a little proud hussy; I came up towards
UHRSTROM, Studies on the langi of Sam. Richardson.
170
the little pretty altar-piece; They wece shown another little
neat apartment (Pamela; Uhrstrom). Other instances:
Even in the little quiet village of Castlewood (H. Esmond).
The disease dealt very kindly with her little modest face
(Thackeray, Philip). The little old gentleman was suddenly
seized with a fit of trepidation (Poe, Hans Pfaal). Her
little white hands are fluttering like doves 1 (Shaw, Salome).
I do not quite know what to make of the following: I long to
talk with the young noble soldier (All's well, IV: 5).
325. Speaking of the order between 'such' and 'another'
POUTSMA states: « Usage is divided as to the placing of
'such' and 'another', either of which may precede the other.
The arrangement < such another», however, is the usual
one. Murray, another, 1, c.». (Poutsma, p. 346).
It seems at least to be the oldest.
Compare: Oile or butter fressh, or sache ofjer (Fistula),
g-if pacientes pleyne ]>at per medicynes bene bitter or sharp
or sich oper, pan shal . . . (ib.). There was not such an-
other ragged family in the parish (Fielding, Andrews).
326. When one of the attributes is a numeral, this usu-
ally comes first. Yet there are exceptions: Her syndon
inne unwemme twa dohtor mine- (Caedm.; Matzner). Bisie
two wummen (Ancren Riwle).
Thus still with 'past1: The past three weeks (Cf. Dur-
ing the past few months. Roy. Mag., June, 1910); — with
'said' and 'following' 3: The seid III! arbitrours (Cov. L.
B., 1464), The said two persons, The following three quota-
tions; - with 'other' when the def/art. precedes: On pcem
obrum prim dagum (Alfr., Othere; Milliner), pe oder pre
1 It is possible that the author wishes to emphasize also the
littleness of the hands.
- The numeral is unstressed, just like 'little', 'old', etc. Cf. Germ.
Heilige drei Konige; Swed. Det var fruktansvarda 36 timmar, vi haft
att utsta (Sydsv. Dagbl., Oct. 8, 1910).
3 When pronominal. But: The three following days (Sweet).
171
fringes (A. Riwle), The other three wise men; - - and with
'next': The next two years. Similarly: The second two notions
(Fearenside, M. S., Jan. 1911). - But also: The two follow-
ing lines: . . . (Abbott). With Mast' and 'first', cf. § 328.
Thus formerly usually, and sometimes also in Modern 327.
English, in connection with 'other' without any art.: l
He ... gesaegh opre twegen gebroper (Rushw. Gloss.).
My Cosyn schel have other X marces (E. E. Wills, 1417).
He and opir pre felawls (Capgrave, Aug.; 1450). The Lord
appointed other seventy also (Auth. Vers., Luke, 10: 1).
Other seven days (Gen., 8: 12; Matzner). [He] would
have . . . sworn to other nlne-and-thlrty [sc. Articles] with
entire obedience (Esmond). Other seven faces there were,
carried higher, seven dead faces (Two Cities).
Compare with these: A wretched 200 pounds (= only £ 200).-
There was silence in the room for full (= fully) three minutes (God
in the Car). For full five minutes (Two Years). B
Whether it is more correct to say The first (last) two 328.
or to say The two first (last), is a question that has been
a subject for much debate. I have already cited SWEET'S
opinion (§ 321). According to the N. E. D. the latter
arrangement seems to have been the more common up
to the 17th century.
I annex some quotations of my own: J>e ne^ende
article and pe pri laste (Ayenb.). The Turke liked best
the two first wales (Three Kings' Sons, 1500). The four
first acts (Sheridan, Critic, I: 1). - The word-order may
be a matter of taste, in most cases, but when the cardi-
nal is only an extra addition, it would receive too much
1 'Other' here looks very much like an adverb (= 'additionally',
'further'). Cf. however: Opir certeyn women (Capgrave, St. Gilbert).
2 The indef. art. makes it clear that «200 pounds » is treated as
a compound subst. Cf. That five minutes on the shore had told her
that (Two Years Ago). Cf. also: Another two minutes.
8 But also: It is six full months since . . . (Two Years).
172
stress if it were not placed next to the noun; thus: The
first six [or seven] weeks. For the last three days (2 Years).
The last few days (ib.). Cf. «a nice little girl».(§ 322 ff.). ]
329. Otherwise the same principles are observed in the
case of ordinals as in the case of other adjectives. Thus:
The third pretty woman was Miss A.; but: The action
would have been almost imperceptible to an observant third
person (Twist).
330. In older English the rule pronounced by SWEET also
applies to poss. pronouns. FRANZ says on this matter
(Sh. Gram. § 166): «Ein Adjektiv kann in der alteren Sprache
vor das poss. Pron. treten, wenn letzteres mit dem folgenden
Substantiv eng verwachsen ist, wie in good my lord, dear
my liege, sweet my child*. — In A. S. and M. E. this
word-order was used also when one of the attributes was
a pronominal or numeral word.
Examples: Twegen his ceftergengan - (/Elfr., Horn.;
Milliner). The sayd our soveraign lorde (Cov. L. B., 1430).
Thurgh the same our lande (ib., 1472). Dyvers myn olde
frendes (Flugels Leseb.; Einenkel, Anglia XVIII). Do, good
my friend (Othello, III: 1). Good my liege (K. John, I: 1.
Imitated by Addison and Bulwer; Matzner). Do so, good
mine host (M. Wives, I: 3). Imitated by SCOTT: True, good
mine host, the day was long talked of (Kenil worth).
Conclusion.
331 It has been shown in this treatise how considerably
English differs from other Teutonic languages as to the
1 Note also the difference between The twenty-first years, and
The first twenty years!
3 Cf. Swed. Straffarbete for hustrudrap och sedlighetsbrott mot
tre sina dottrar (Sydsv. Dagbl.).
173
place of the adjective attribute. In numerous cases the
attribute must or may follow its head-word. Similar gram-
matical principles are, upon the whole, unknown to mod-
ern German, Dutch, Swedish, or Danish prose. Never-
theless I have tried in most cases to explain the inverted
word-order out of the language itself, leaving out of con-
sideration -- where that was possible -- the influence that
French has in several other departments exercised on the
English tongue. English is in so many other respects un-
like its cognates. Why should it not then have followed
its own course also as regards word-order? One must,
of course, partially agree with H. WEIL l in saying that
«l'anglais ... en raison de son origine meme, occupe
naturellement une place intermediate entre Fallemand et
le francos ». But certainly it is not owing to French in-
fluence that Swedes and Germans are allowed without
further circumstances to place an attributive adjective after
its noun in poetry! Moreover, in the case of English it
must be remembered that the adjectives in this language
have been inflexible for many hundred years past, so that the
attribute does not differ from the predicative complement,
any more than the participle does from the supine.
We have also seen that development goes in the di- 332.
rection of pre-position: Even a verbal participle can some-
times be put before the noun, in more conformity with the
word-order in German and Swedish. And concerning adjec-
tives we are able to perceive a tendency not to suffer an
adverbial modifier of some length imperatively to entail
postposition of the attribute, a constraint which the other
Teutonic dialects have long ago shaken off.
De I'ordre des mots dans les langues anciennes. Paris 1869.
251389
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11